WO2016006622A1 - Terminal device, mme, pgw, communication system and communication control method - Google Patents

Terminal device, mme, pgw, communication system and communication control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016006622A1
WO2016006622A1 PCT/JP2015/069592 JP2015069592W WO2016006622A1 WO 2016006622 A1 WO2016006622 A1 WO 2016006622A1 JP 2015069592 W JP2015069592 W JP 2015069592W WO 2016006622 A1 WO2016006622 A1 WO 2016006622A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
address
pdn
request message
mme
message
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/069592
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
陽子 増田
真史 新本
Original Assignee
シャープ株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by シャープ株式会社 filed Critical シャープ株式会社
Publication of WO2016006622A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016006622A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00Network data management
    • H04W8/26Network addressing or numbering for mobility support
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/14Direct-mode setup
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/12Setup of transport tunnels

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a terminal device, an MME, a PGW, a communication system, a communication control method, and the like.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 Evolved Packet System
  • LTE LongEPTerm Evolution
  • a wireless LAN is considered as an access system connected to EPS.
  • ProSe Proximity based Service
  • 3GPP EPS 3GPP EPS specification.
  • ProSe has a function (discovery) for detecting neighboring communication terminals between UEs (User Equipment) as communication terminals and a function (direct communication) for establishing direct communication between UEs without using a core network or a base station. It aims to realize the services it provides.
  • eICBD Evolution for infrastructure data Communication Between Devices
  • P2P Peer to Peer
  • M2M Machine to Machine
  • GRIP address globally routed IP address
  • 3GPP TS 23.401 Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects General Packet Radio Service Provider (GPRS) enhancements for Evolved Worlds).
  • Non-Patent Document 3 describes that each mobile communication carrier assigns a GRIP address to a UE registered in an application server. However, the method for obtaining the GRIP address of the UE is not clear.
  • the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a suitable means for obtaining a GRIP address so as not to affect the current procedure as much as possible.
  • the terminal device of the present invention includes a transmission unit that transmits a PDN connectivity request message to a MME (Mobility Management Entity), and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP in a PDN connectivity request message.
  • First identification information indicating that an address allocation is requested, and a reception unit that receives a PDN connectivity accept message from the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and a PDN connectivity accept message Includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and based on the transmission of the first identification information, the global router And having a storage unit that acquires Le IP address, the.
  • the MME (Mobility Management Entity) of the present invention includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP in a receiving unit that receives a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from a terminal device, and a PDN connectivity request message.
  • a PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and the PDN connectivity accept message includes at least A PDN connectivity network including an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, based on receiving the first identification information. And having a transmitter which transmits including Gurobari routable IP address to the concept message.
  • the PGW (PDN Gateway) of the present invention includes a receiving unit that receives a session establishment request message from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on the transmission of a terminal device PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message, and a session establishment request message.
  • a session establishment request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating a request for assignment of a globally routable IP address, and based on reception of the first identification information, a globally routable IP address
  • a transmission unit that transmits a session establishment response message to the SGW as a response to the session establishment request message.
  • the session establishment response message message includes at least an APN and And the PDN type, include Gurobari routable IP address, characterized in that.
  • the terminal apparatus of the present invention transmits a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) and sends a first request message requesting to change the IP address to a globally routable IP address.
  • the transmission unit to be transmitted to the base station apparatus and the PDN connectivity request message include at least an APN and a PDN type, and a PDN connectivity accept message is received from the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message.
  • the PDN connectivity accept message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and includes a first request message.
  • the communication control method for a terminal device includes a step of transmitting a PDN connectivity request message to an MME (Mobility Management Entity), and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a global router in the PDN connectivity request message.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • the MME (Mobility Management Entity) communication control method of the present invention includes a step of receiving a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from a terminal device, and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a global router in the PDN connectivity request message. Transmitting a PDN connectivity accept message to the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and PDN connectivity accept The message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address. Wherein the inclusion of the step of transmitting including the connection Kuti Byi tee Gurobari routable IP address to accept message.
  • PDN Packet Data Network
  • a session establishment request message is received from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on transmission of a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message of a terminal device, and a session establishment
  • the request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that a globally routable IP address assignment request is requested.
  • the globally routable A session establishment response message including at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address as a response to the session establishment request message.
  • the communication control method of the terminal device of the present invention includes a step of transmitting a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message including at least an APN and a PDN type in MME (Mobility Management Entity), and a response to the PDN connectivity request message.
  • a PDN connectivity accept message including at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address from the base station apparatus, and requesting to change the IP address to a globally routable IP address.
  • 1 request message to the MME or the base station apparatus receiving a response message to the first request message, Based on the reception of the message, and wherein the inclusion of the step of changing the IP address to Gurobari routable IP address.
  • the communication system of the present invention is a communication system that includes at least a terminal device, a base station device, an MME (Mobility Management Entity), an SGW (Serving Gateway), and a PGW (PDN Gateway).
  • a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message is transmitted.
  • the PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that a globally routable IP address is requested to be allocated.
  • the MME receives the PDN connectivity request message from the terminal device, and based on the reception of the PDN connectivity request message, the MME sends a session establishment request message to S And the session establishment request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information, and the SGW receives the session establishment request message from the MME and is based on reception of the session establishment request message.
  • the session establishment request message is transmitted to the PGW, and the session establishment request message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the first identification information.
  • the PGW receives the session establishment request message from the SGW, On the basis of the reception of the identification information 1, a globally routable IP address is assigned to the terminal device, and a session establishment response message is transmitted to the SGW as a response to the session establishment request message. , PDN type, The SGW receives a session establishment response message from the PGW, and, based on the reception of the session establishment response message, the SGW sends a session establishment response message as a response to the session establishment request message. A response message is transmitted to the MME, and the session establishment response message is transmitted including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address. The MME receives the session establishment response message from the SGW, and establishes the session.
  • a PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station as a response to the PDN connectivity request message transmitted by the MME, and the PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted.
  • the base station apparatus receives the PDN connectivity accept message from the MME, and based on the reception of the session establishment response message, A PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the terminal device.
  • the PDN connectivity accept message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and the terminal device transmits the PDN connectivity accept message.
  • An accept message is received from a base station apparatus, and a globally routable IP address is acquired based on transmission of identification information.
  • the conventional PDN connectivity procedure is extended, and the UE can acquire a globally routable IP address from the mobile communication carrier.
  • the GRIP address is not limited to a globally unique IP address, and may be an IP address that can be routed globally.
  • the GRIP address may be a private IP address.
  • the GRIP address may be an IP address that is converted into a globally unique IP address by using a NAT (Network Access Transportation) function by the core network.
  • NAT Network Access Transportation
  • the GRIP address is an IP address assigned to a terminal device by a certain mobile communication carrier network when a mobile communication carrier network such as a different core network is configured by a plurality of mobile communication carriers
  • the IP address may be an IP address that can be routed from the mobile carrier network assigned the IP address to another mobile carrier network.
  • the GRIP address is an IP address acquired by a terminal device connected to a certain mobile communication carrier network, and the terminal device communicates with a terminal device connected to another mobile communication carrier network. It may be an IP address used at the time.
  • the GRIP address may be an IP address used for communication between terminals connected to a single mobile carrier network.
  • the terminal device may acquire a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address based on a conventional method.
  • the conventional IP address may be an IP address that does not execute a special process for the GRIP address by a device included in the IP mobile network including the terminal device described through the present embodiment.
  • the conventional IP address may be a local routability IP address that can be routed only within an IP mobile communication network operated by a single operator. In this embodiment, such an IP address is expressed as a conventional IP address.
  • the terminal device may have both the GRIP address and the conventional IP address at the same time. Further, when acquiring the IP address, the terminal device explicitly requests whether the IP address assignment is requested from the core network by requesting the GRIP address assignment or the conventional IP address assignment. An address may be acquired. Furthermore, when actually transmitting / receiving user data by executing an application or the like, the terminal device may select and use either the GRIP or the conventional IP address.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of a mobile communication system in the present embodiment.
  • the mobile communication system 1 includes a UE (terminal device) 10, an IP mobile communication network 5, and an application server 20.
  • the IP mobile communication network 5 may be, for example, a network that includes a core network or a broadband network.
  • the broadband network is a wired access network that realizes broadband communication, and is constructed by, for example, ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Linear) or an optical fiber.
  • ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Linear
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the broadband network may be a wireless access network such as WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access).
  • the UE 10 is a terminal device connected to LTE, WLAN, or WiMAX, and is connected to the IP mobile communication network 5 by being mounted with a 3GPP LTE communication interface, a WLAN communication interface, a WiMAX communication interface, or the like. It is possible.
  • the application server 20 is a server device that manages a specific application, and has a management function such as authentication of a UE that uses the application.
  • the application server 20 may be a ProSe server.
  • the ProSe server is a server device having a management function such as UE authentication for a service that provides a function related to ProSe such as detection of a neighboring terminal.
  • the IP mobile communication network 5 is connected to the UE 10 and the PDN 9.
  • the PDN 9 is a network that transmits and receives data to and from the UE 10 in packets, and is a service network that provides specific services such as services related to the Internet, IMS, and ProSe, for example.
  • the IP mobile communication network 5 may be a network operated by a communication carrier with which the UE 10 has a contract. Furthermore, the IP mobile communication network 5 may be the Home PLMN of the UE 10. In addition to the UE 10, a plurality of UEs can be connected to the IP mobile communication network 5.
  • the IP mobile communication network 5 may include a core network 7 and each radio access network (LTE AN80, WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70). Furthermore, the core network 7 and each radio access network (LTE AN80, WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70) may be connected.
  • LTE AN80, WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70 may be connected.
  • the core network 7 includes an HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 50, an AAA (Authentication, Authorization, Accounting) 55, a PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Rules) 60, a PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 30, an ePDG (enhanced Packet Packet Data Gateway). ) 65, SGW (Serving Gateway) 35, and MME (Mobile Management Entity) 40.
  • HSS Home Subscriber Server
  • AAA Authentication, Authorization, Accounting
  • PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Rules
  • PGW Packet Data Network Gateway
  • ePDG enhanced Packet Packet Data Gateway
  • SGW Serving Gateway
  • MME Mobile Management Entity
  • the application server 20 described with reference to FIG. 1 may be configured to be included in the PDN 9, or may be configured to be included in the IP mobile communication network 5 independently of the PDN 9, or may be configured as a core network. 7 may be included.
  • the radio access network may be composed of a plurality of different access networks. Each access network is connected to the core network 7. Furthermore, the UE 10 can wirelessly connect to the radio access network.
  • an LTE access network (LTE AN80) that can be connected by an LTE access system and an access network (WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70) that can be connected by a WLAN access system can be configured.
  • the access network connectable by the WLAN access system includes a WLAN access network b (WLAN ANb75) for connecting the ePDG 65 as a connection device to the core network 7, and a WLAN access network a (WLAN for connecting the PGW 30, the PCRF 60, and the AAA 55).
  • WLAN access network a WLAN for connecting the PGW 30, the PCRF 60, and the AAA 55.
  • ANa75 can be configured.
  • each apparatus is comprised similarly to the conventional apparatus in the mobile communication system using EPS, detailed description is abbreviate
  • each device will be briefly described.
  • the PGW 30 is connected to the PDN 9, the SGW 35, the ePDG 65, the WLAN ANa 70, the PCRF 60 and the AAA 55, and performs user data delivery as a gateway device of the PDN 9 and the core network 7.
  • the SGW 35 is connected to the PGW 30, the MME 40, and the LTE AN 80, and performs user data delivery as a gateway device between the core network 7 and the LTE AN 80.
  • the MME 40 is connected to the SGW 35, the LTE AN 80, and the HSS 50, and is an access control device that performs location information management and access control of the UE 10 via the LTE AN 80.
  • the core network 7 may include a plurality of location management devices.
  • an MME different from the MME 40 may be included as a location management device different from the MME 40.
  • an MME different from the MME 40 is referred to as MME-A90.
  • the MME-A 90 may be connected to the SGW 35, the LTE AN 80, and the HSS 50 in the same manner as the MME 40. Further, the MME-A 90 may be connected to a gateway different from the SGW 35 configured in the core network 7 instead of the SGW 35 to which the MME 40 is connected.
  • MME-A 90 and the MME 40 may be connected. Thereby, MME-A90 and MME40 may perform transmission / reception of the context of UE10.
  • the HSS 50 is connected to the MME 40 and the AAA 55, and is a management node that manages subscriber information.
  • the subscriber information of the HSS 50 is referred to at the time of access control of the MME 40, for example.
  • AAA 55 is connected to PGW 30, HSS 50, PCRF 60, and WLAN ANa 70, and performs access control for UE 10 connected via WLAN ANa 70.
  • PCRF 60 is connected to PGW 30, WLAN ANa 75, AAA 55, and PDN 9, and performs QoS management for data delivery. For example, QoS management of the communication path between the UE 10 and the PDN 9 is performed.
  • the ePDG 65 is connected to the PGW 30 and the WLAN ANb 75, and delivers user data as a gateway device between the core network 7 and the WLAN ANb 75.
  • each radio access network includes a device (for example, a base station device or an access point device) to which the UE 10 is actually connected.
  • a device used for connection a device adapted to a radio access network can be considered.
  • the LTE AN 80 includes the eNB 45.
  • the eNB 45 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected in the LTE access system, and the LTE AN 80 may be configured to include one or a plurality of radio base stations.
  • the WLAN ANa 70 includes a WLAN APa 72 and a GW (Gateway) 74.
  • the WLAN APa 72 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected with a WLAN access system that is reliable to the operator operating the core network 7, and the WLAN ANa 70 includes one or more radio base stations. Good.
  • the GW 74 is a gateway device for the core network 7 and the WLAN ANa 70. Further, the WLAN APa 72 and the GW 74 may be configured by a single device.
  • WLAN ANb75 is configured to include WLAN APb76.
  • the WLAN APb 76 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected in the WLAN access system when a trust relationship is not established with the operator operating the core network 7, and the WLAN ANb 75 includes one or more radio base stations. It may be configured to be included.
  • the WLAN ANb 75 is connected to the core network 7 using the ePDG 65, which is a device included in the core network 7, as a gateway.
  • the ePDG 65 has a security function for ensuring safety.
  • the fact that the UE 10 is connected to each radio access network means that the UE 10 is connected to a base station apparatus, an access point, etc. included in each radio access network. Also via a base station device or access point.
  • FIG.3 shows the structure of UE10 in this embodiment.
  • an LTE interface unit 110 and a storage unit 140 are connected to the control unit 100 via a bus.
  • the control unit 100 is a functional unit for controlling the UE 10.
  • the control unit 100 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 140.
  • the LTE interface unit 110 is a functional unit for the UE 10 to connect to the LTE base station and connect to the IP access network.
  • An external antenna 112 is connected to the LTE interface unit 110.
  • the storage unit 140 stores permission information 144, GRIP address information 146, and IP address information 148.
  • the permission information 144 may be permission information notified from the application server 20 as shown in FIG. Further, the permission information may be information indicating that the use of a specific application is permitted.
  • the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode.
  • the permission information may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. .
  • the UE 10 may store application information and permission information in association with each other.
  • the UE 10 may store the permission information in association with the APN (Access Point Name).
  • the permission information 144 may store a plurality of APNs for one UE.
  • the APN is identification information that can identify a communication service for the UE 10 and a service network to which the UE 10 is connected to the core network.
  • the APN 1 is a communication service in which the UE 10 uses a GRIP address, or GRIP.
  • the GRIP address information 146 can store an APN, a GRIP address, and application identification information.
  • An example of the GRIP address information 146 is shown in FIG.
  • the UE 10 associates the GRIP address information 146 with the APN information of the UE, the GRIP address, and application identification information for identifying an application that can communicate using the GRIP address. You may remember.
  • the UE 10 may perform communication of a specific application using the associated GRIP address from the GRIP address information 146.
  • the IP address information 148 stores a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address.
  • FIG. 3D shows an example of the IP address information 148. Note that the UE 10 may store the IP address, the APN, the IP address, and the application identification information in association with each other.
  • the UE 10 can execute communication using a conventional IP address in addition to communication using a GRIP address by storing the GRIP and the conventional IP address.
  • the UE 10 stores the GRIP address information 146 and the IP address information 148 at the same time, the UE 10 selects and uses the corresponding IP address based on the application identification information or the APN at the time of application communication. May be.
  • the UE 10 may use the selected IP address as the source IP address in the transmission of user data. More specifically, when the application identification information used for the service started by the UE 10 is App ID A, the application data of the App ID A is transmitted, and the UE 10 transmits based on the correspondence shown in FIG.
  • a GRIP address may be selected as the source IP address of the IP packet to be transmitted.
  • an IP mobile communication network interface unit 210 and a storage unit 240 are connected to the control unit 200 via a bus.
  • the control unit 200 is a functional unit for controlling the application server 20.
  • the control unit 200 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 240.
  • Application server 20 stores permission information 244 and GRIP address information 246 in storage unit 240.
  • the permission information 244 can store application usage permission information for registered UEs.
  • the UE 10 is permitted to use an application managed by the application server 20.
  • the GRIP address information 246 can store a GRIP address notified from the UE 10 that has authenticated use of the application.
  • the permission information 244 may be information indicating permission to use a specific application.
  • the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode.
  • the permission information 244 may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. good.
  • the application server 20 may store the application information and the permission information in association with each terminal device.
  • FIG. 5A The device configuration of the MME 40 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, in the MME 40, an IP mobile communication network interface unit 320 and a storage unit 340 are connected to the control unit 300 via a bus.
  • the control unit 300 is a functional unit for controlling the MME 40.
  • the control unit 300 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 340.
  • Permission information 342 is stored in the storage unit 340. As shown in FIG. 5B, the permission information 342 can store the permission information for each UE managed by the MME 40. Further, identification information of an application server registered by the UE may be registered. Or MME40 may memorize
  • the HSS 50 may manage the permission information 342 of the UE instead of the MME 40.
  • the HSS 50 may store the permission information 342 in association with the identifier of the UE, or may store registration information for each APN.
  • the permission information 342 may be information indicating permission to use a specific application.
  • the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode.
  • the permission information may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. .
  • the MME 40 may store the application information and the permission information in association with each terminal device.
  • the MME 40 may store the permission information in association with the APN (Access Point Name).
  • APN Access Point Name
  • APN is a communication service for UE 10 and identification information corresponding to a service network to which UE 10 is connected via a core network.
  • APN 1 is a service for UE 10 to provide a communication service using a GRIP address or a communication service using a GRIP address.
  • This is identification information corresponding to the network
  • the APN 2 corresponds to a service network in which the UE 10 provides a communication service using a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address or a communication service using a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address. This indicates identification information.
  • FIG. 6A The apparatus configuration of the PGW 30 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the PGW 30, an IP mobile communication network interface unit 420 and a storage unit 440 are connected to the control unit 400 via a bus.
  • the control unit 400 is a functional unit for controlling the PGW 30.
  • the control unit 400 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 440.
  • the storage unit 440 can store a GRIP address management table. As shown in FIG. 6B, the GRIP address management table can manage the GRIP address of each UE assigned by the PGW.
  • the PGW 30 confirms the IP header of the IP packet including the user data received from the UE 10 and forwards it to the destination if the source IP address is a GRIP address. Otherwise, the packet is discarded or the packet Processing such as stopping the transfer may be executed.
  • the UE 10 executes an attach procedure and connects to the core network (S502). As a result, the UE 10 establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30.
  • the PDN connection is a communication path for transmitting / receiving data to / from the PDN 9.
  • the attach procedure may be executed as an initial procedure such as when the UE 10 is powered on.
  • the attach procedure starts when the UE 10 transmits an attach request to the MME 40.
  • the attach request may be transmitted by including UE identification information such as APN or IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity).
  • the APN is not necessarily included in the attach request message, and may be notified from the UE 10 to the MME 40 by a control message in the attach procedure.
  • the APN transmitted here may not be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using a GRIP address.
  • the APN may be an APN associated with permission information that prohibits assignment of a GRIP address. Therefore, the IP address acquired by the UE 10 by transmitting the APN in the attach procedure may be a conventional IP address instead of the GRIP address.
  • the MME 40 confirms the permission information based on the received UE identification information or APN. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the permission information corresponds to the identification information of the UE, the identification information of the UE is used for confirmation of the permission information. If the permission information of UE10 can be confirmed, MME40 will select PGW30 based on received APN, and will determine the end point of the PDN connection with respect to UE10. Furthermore, establishment of a PDN connection and connection to a core network are permitted, and an attach permission message serving as a response to the attach request message is transmitted to the UE 10. The attach permission message may be transmitted directly from the MME 40 to the UE 10 or may be transmitted via the eNB 45 included in the LTE AN 80.
  • the MME 40 may notify that the UE 10 is permitted to connect to the core network by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the MME 40 may notify that the PDN connection has been established by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the attach permission message may be transmitted including the IP address associated with the PDN connection or the APN. Further, identification information for identifying a communication flow or application such as a TFT (Traffic Flow Template) corresponding to the IP address may be included in the message and transmitted.
  • TFT Traffic Flow Template
  • the UE 10 can acquire the conventional IP address from the core network and execute communication using the conventional IP address.
  • UE10 may perform the registration procedure to an application server, in order to acquire GRIP, after acquiring a conventional IP address.
  • the UE 10 searches for the application server 20 and secures secure communication with the searched application server 20 (S504).
  • the application server 20 may be an application server corresponding to an application with which the UE 10 communicates using a GRIP address. Further, in the registration procedure, the application server 20 may perform processing such as authentication for use of the application to the UE 10 and approval for acquisition of the GRIP of the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 searches for the application server 20 by, for example, pre-holding application server identification information such as FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the application server, and the UE 10 based on the identification information.
  • the application server 20 can be searched by transmitting control information for making an inquiry to a DNS (Domain Name System) server and acquiring the IP address of the application server together with a response to the control information.
  • the search method of the application server 20 is not limited to this, You may search using other methods, such as UE10 memorize
  • IPSec may be used as a method for establishing a secure communication path between the UE 10 and the application server 20.
  • the communication path establishment method is not particularly limited to this, and it is sufficient that a secure communication path can be established between the UE 10 and the application server 20.
  • the UE 10 transmits to the application server 20 an authentication request for using the application that the UE 10 communicates with using the GRIP address (S506).
  • This request includes a request for assigning a GRIP address in addition to a registration request for using a specific application, as in the conventional request. That is, the UE 10 may request the application server 20 to authenticate use of a specific application that performs communication using the GRIP address and to assign a GRIP address by transmitting an authentication request message.
  • This request may be an authentication request for the use of such a specific application when an application that performs communication using the GRIP address is determined in advance.
  • the authentication request to the application server 20 may include the location information of the UE 10 and the identification information of the UE 10.
  • the location information of the UE may include Cell ID of the LTE base station apparatus, TAI (Tracking Area ID), and GPS (Global Positioning System) information.
  • the application server 20 receives the authentication request from the UE 10 and transmits an authentication response to the UE 10 based on the reception (S508).
  • the application server 20 may include authentication information indicating an authentication result in the authentication response. Further, the application server 20 may include information that can identify the application, such as a TFT and an APN, in the authentication response. Moreover, you may include both of these.
  • the UE 10 receives a control message indicating an authentication response as a response to the authentication request message.
  • the UE 10 may acquire authentication information included in the control message.
  • the application server 20 may manage user information and permission information in association with each other in advance, and may determine an authentication result for the UE 10 that transmits an authentication request based on such management information.
  • the UE 10 receives an authentication response message as a response to the authentication request message from application server 20.
  • information included in the authentication response message may be stored.
  • the UE 10 may start a procedure for acquiring a GRIP address based on reception of a message indicating that the application server 20 has authenticated.
  • the UE 10 may start a PDN connectivity procedure including a request for a GRIP address (S510).
  • the UE 10 transmits a PDN connectivity request to the MME 40 (S602).
  • the PDN connectivity request includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Further, the authentication information for using the application received from the application server 20 may be included in the PDN connectivity request.
  • the identification information indicating that the GRIP address is requested may be an APN.
  • the APN transmitted here may be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10 may request assignment of a GRIP address by performing a PDN connectivity procedure for transmitting such an APN. Further, when the UE 10 holds a plurality of APNs, such an APN may be selected and transmitted in a PDN connectivity request message in order to acquire a GRIP address.
  • identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested may be included in the PDN type.
  • the conventional PDN type was able to identify an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, or both, but in addition to these, the PDN type in this embodiment is an IPv4 address of a GRIP address, an IPv6 address of a GRIP address, and further a GRIP It may be information that identifies both addresses.
  • the UE 10 may request a GRIP address by transmitting a PDN connectivity request including a PDP type indicating the IPv6 address of the GRIP address.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto, and a flag or the like may be used as identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested.
  • the MME 40 receives the PDN connectivity request from the UE 10.
  • the MME 40 may receive identification information indicating that an APN, a PDN type, and a GRIP address are requested, which are included in the PDN connectivity request.
  • the MME 40 determines the SGW 35 and the PGW 30 based on the received APN included in the PDN connectivity request. Thereby, the gateway which is a relay apparatus in the communication path between UE10 and PDN9 is determined.
  • the MME 40 transmits a session establishment request to the SGW 35 (S604).
  • the MME 40 may transmit the session establishment request including the APN, the PDN type, information for identifying the PGW 30, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Further, APN may be used as identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested.
  • the MME 40 manages user information and permission information indicating whether to assign a GRIP address to the user in advance, performs authentication of GRIP address assignment based on the management information, and based on the authentication result.
  • a session establishment request may be transmitted. Specifically, when the UE 10 is permitted to assign a GRIP address, a session establishment request is transmitted to the SGW 35. In addition, when the allocation is not permitted, the MME 40 transmits a response to the PDN connectivity request to the UE 10 and notifies that the GRIP address is not allocated or the establishment of the PDN connection is not permitted. Good. Moreover, MME40 may transmit a response message to UE10 via eNB45.
  • the permission information indicating whether the user needs to assign a GRIP address includes the UE 10a indicating a connection using an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address. Whether or not to allow applications that communicate using the GRIP address and communication services that communicate using the GRIP address, managed in association with the user or the UE 10a. May be subscriber information.
  • the MME 40 may request establishment of a PDN connection between the UE 10 and the PGW 30 by transmitting a session establishment request, or may request a GRIP address.
  • the SGW 35 receives a session establishment request from the MME.
  • the SGW 35 may receive the APN included in the session establishment request, the PDN type, the PGW identification information, and the identification information indicating that the GRIP address is requested.
  • the SGW 35 transmits a session establishment request to the PGW 30 (S606).
  • the session establishment request transmitted by the SGW 35 may include at least APN, PDN type, PGW identification information, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Accordingly, the SGW 35 may request the PGW 30 to establish a PDN connection between the UE 10 and the PGW 30, or may request the UE 10 to assign a GRIP address.
  • the PGW 30 receives a session establishment request from the SGW 35.
  • the PGW 30 may receive identification information indicating that an APN, a PDN type, and a GRIP address are included in the session establishment request.
  • the PGW 30 assigns a GRIP address to the UE 10 based on the reception of the session establishment request (S608).
  • the PGW 30 may assign a GRIP address based on information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Specifically, when the information indicating that the GRIP address is requested is received, the PGW 30 assigns the GRIP address, and when the information indicating that the GRIP address is requested is not received, the conventional IP address May be assigned.
  • the received APN is an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the PGW 30 may assign a GRIP address to the UE 10, and when receiving an APN associated with another application or communication service, the PGW 30 may assign a conventional IP address.
  • the PGW 30 transmits a session establishment response message to the SGW 35 as a response message to the session establishment request (S610).
  • the PGW 30 may transmit the session establishment response message including the APN, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE. Further, a timer indicating that the use of the IP address is valid may be included in the session establishment response message.
  • the SGW 35 receives the session establishment response message from the PGW 30 and acquires the GRIP address assigned to the UE 10. Next, the SGW 35 transmits a session establishment response message to the MME 40 as a response to the session establishment request received from the MME 40 (S612).
  • the session establishment response message includes the APN, PDN type, and IP address.
  • the MME 40 may receive the APN included in the session establishment response, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE. Further, a timer indicating that the use of the IP address is valid may be included in the session establishment response message.
  • the MME 40 transmits a PDN connectivity accept to the eNB 45 as a response message of the PDN connection request transmitted by the UE 10 (S614).
  • the PDN connectivity accept may be transmitted including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE 10.
  • the MME 40 may transmit the IP address including the GRIP address.
  • the MME 40 may include a timer indicating that the use of the GRIP address is valid in the PDN connectivity accept in the message.
  • the eNB 45 may receive the PDN connectivity accept and receive the UE identification information included in the PDN connectivity accept, the GRIP address assigned to the UE 10, and the information identifying the APN to be connected.
  • the eNB 45 may allocate radio resources established between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 based on this reception.
  • the eNB 45 may transmit a PDN connectivity accept including the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the UE 10 (S616).
  • the PDN connectivity accept may include UE identification information, a GRIP address assigned to the UE, and information identifying the APN to be connected. Furthermore, information including resources and a timer indicating the validity period of the GRIP address may be transmitted.
  • the UE 10 receives the PDN connectivity accept and RRC connection reset message.
  • the UE 10 may receive the UE identification information, the GRIP address assigned to the UE, the information identifying the APN to be connected, and the PDN type included in the PDN connectivity accept.
  • the UE 10 acquires a GRIP address based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message.
  • the UE 10 may detect that the connectivity to the APN has been established by receiving the PDN connectivity accept and the RRC reconnection setup message. Further, the UE 10 may detect that a communication path for performing communication corresponding to the APN has been established. Moreover, UE10 may acquire the GRIP address used for globally routable communication corresponding to APN.
  • the UE 10 may establish a PDN connection with the PGW based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message.
  • the UE 10 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the eNB 45 (S618). Further, the direct transfer message is transmitted to the eNB 45 (S622).
  • the eNB 45 transmits an initial context setting response message to the MME 40 upon reception of the RRC connection reconfiguration completion message (S620). Moreover, eNB45 transmits an attachment completion message to MME40 with reception of a direct transfer message (S640).
  • the UE 10 can establish a PDN connection with the PGW 30.
  • the UE 10 may perform communication of an application managed by the application server 20 using the established PDN connection.
  • the UE 10 associates the GRIP address received from the eNB 45 with the application identification information (S626).
  • the application identification information is identification information for identifying an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the specific application identification information may be APN.
  • the APN stored here may be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using a GRIP address.
  • the application identification information may be a TFT that identifies an application flow.
  • both APN and TFT may be stored as application identification information.
  • the UE 10 can perform communication of the application identified by the application identification information by using the PDN connection established with the PGW 30.
  • the application identified by the application identification information is an application that realizes communication between devices such as P2P.
  • FIG. 9 shows an overall view of a system for explaining an example of communication between terminals using a GRIP address.
  • the communication system 2 shown in FIG. 9 includes a UE 10a, a UE 10b, an IP mobile communication network 5, and an application server 20.
  • the mobile communication carriers with which the UE 10a and the UE 10b make a contract are the same, but they are connected to the same IP mobile communication network 5, but they may have contracts with different mobile communication carriers. That is, the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be connected to different IP mobile communication networks. At that time, IP mobile communication networks of different communication carriers may be connected to each other. More specifically, IP mobile communication network verbs may be connected by connecting PGWs configured in respective IP networks.
  • the GRIP address may be an IP address permitted to deliver a packet from an IP mobile communication network operated by a certain mobile communication carrier to an IP mobile communication network operated by another mobile communication carrier.
  • the PGW transmits the packet to the PGW configured in the IP mobile communication network operated by a different mobile communication carrier, and receives the packet received from the UE 10a. If the source address is a conventional IP address and not a GRIP address, the packet may not be transmitted and a process such as discarding the packet may be executed.
  • the GRIP address may be an address for delivery between different mobile communication carrier networks.
  • the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be an IP mobile communication network operated by a single communication carrier.
  • the GRIP address may be an IP address that permits delivery of a packet to be transmitted / received between terminals within the IP mobile communication network.
  • the PGW may deliver the packet not to the PDN but to the communication partner terminal.
  • the IP mobile communication network is configured to include a plurality of PGWs
  • the PGW establishes a PDN connection when the packet is received from the UE 10a because the source address of the packet is a GRIP address. May be delivered to the PGW.
  • processing such as discarding the packet may be performed without transmitting the packet.
  • the configuration of the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and the configuration of the application server 20 is the same as the configuration shown in FIG.
  • the application server is configured by a single device, and all IP mobile networks It may be connected to a communication network, or a plurality of IP mobile communication networks may be configured. Further, it is assumed that the UE 10a and the UE 10b have the same application ID.
  • each of the UE 10a and the UE 10b performs an authentication process for using an application from the application server 20.
  • the application usage authentication process may be the process shown in FIG.
  • the UE 10a acquires the GRIP address from the PGW 30 in the process shown in FIG. 8 during the PDN connectivity procedure.
  • the UE 10a transmits a control message for notifying the acquired GRIP address to the application server 20.
  • the UE 10a may transmit the control message including at least the GRIP address and the application ID. Further, a timer indicating the identification information of the UE and the validity period of the GRIP address may be included.
  • Application server 20 receives a control message for notifying the GRIP address from UE 10a.
  • the application server 20 acquires the GRIP address of the UE 10a included in the GRIP address notification signal and stores it in the GRIP address information 246 of the storage unit 240.
  • a timer indicating the validity period of the GRIP address may be stored in association with it. In this case, the timer count may be started, the time until the timer is consumed, the GRIP address may be stored, and the GRIP address may be deleted from the storage unit 240 when triggered by the timer being consumed.
  • the application server 20 may store the UE 10a and the GRIP address in association with each other and manage that the UE 10a acquires the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10b detects the GRIP address of the UE 10a stored in the application server 20, and requests the application server 20 for permission for the UE 10b to perform P2P communication with the UE 10a using the GRIP address of the UE 10a.
  • the application server 20 may determine permission of P2P communication using the GRIP address for the UE 10b. Or the application server 20 may request
  • Application server 20 transmits permission information of the GRIP address to UE 10b.
  • the UE 10b receives permission information on the use of the GRIP address from the application server 20 to the UE 10a, and when permitted, starts the P2P communication with the UE 10a using the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10b When the UE 10b acquires a timer together with the GRIP address from the application server 20, the UE 10b starts counting the timer. When the timer is consumed, the UE 10b may stop communication with the UE 10a through the IP connection using the GRIP address. Good.
  • the PGW 30 may transmit a message notifying the UE 10a of a schedule to stop using the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10a may stop using the GRIP address based on the received notification message and notify the application server 20 that the GRIP address cannot be used.
  • the UE 10a may notify the UE 10b that is the communication partner that the use of the GRIP address is stopped.
  • the application server 20 may notify the UE 10b that the use of the GRIP address is stopped.
  • the application server 20 may detect that the UE 10a has acquired the GRIP address. Furthermore, the application server 20 may manage a period during which the UE 10a can perform communication using the GRIP address.
  • a plurality of location management devices may be configured separately from the MME 40.
  • the MME 40 and the MME-A 90 may be configured in the core network 7.
  • the MME-A 90 is different from the MME 40 only in the management of the tracking area, and the other configuration is the same as the MME 40. Therefore, the description of the configuration of the MME-A 90 is omitted.
  • the MME 40 establishes connectivity with a plurality of base station apparatuses including the eNB 45, and configures an area called a tracking area.
  • the MME 40 can manage a group of base stations configured in an area close to a physical position, and configure such an area as a tracking area.
  • the base station group associated with the tracking area may be configured by selecting and configuring a base station that the communication carrier wants to manage and distinguish in operation regardless of whether the location is physically close or not. it can. That is, the MME 40 can manage a plurality of base stations in association with the tracking area and configure the tracking area.
  • the UE 10 may connect to different base stations before and after executing the tracking area update procedure due to movement of the UE 10. Furthermore, the location management device that manages each base station may be different. For example, the UE 10 may move from the base station device managed by the MME 40 to the vicinity of the base station device managed by the MME-A 90 and execute the tracking area update procedure.
  • the tracking area update procedure is a procedure in which the MME-A 90 detects that the UE 10 has moved from the base station managed by the MME 40 to the base station managed by the MME-A 90. For the UE 10, it is a procedure for moving from the tracking area managed by the MME 40 to the tracking area managed by the MME-A 90.
  • relocation MME-Relocation
  • the tracking area update procedure including relocation of the position management device will be described.
  • the UE 10 is connected to the core network 7 via the eNB 45 and establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30 according to the procedure described above. Furthermore, it registers with the application server 20, acquires a GRIP address, and establishes IP connection using GRIP address with other UE. UE10 performs transmission / reception using such a communication path.
  • the UE 10 does not perform data transmission / reception using the PDN connection and the IP connection using the GRIP address for a predetermined time or more, the radio bearer between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 is released, and transitions to the idle mode.
  • the initial state when performing the tracking area update procedure is not limited to this, and may be any state including a conventional state in which the UE 10 updates the tracking area. Further, the UE 10 may execute the tracking update procedure in the active mode regardless of whether or not the UE 10 is in the idle mode.
  • the UE 10 may transmit a tracking area update request message to the eNB-A 95, which is a base station device different from the eNB 45, with movement.
  • the tracking update procedure will be described.
  • the UE10 transmits a tracking area update request message to eNB-A95 (S1002).
  • the message may include the identification information of the UE 10, the information for identifying the tracking area, the identification information of the location management device, the application identification information, the application user identification information, and the application permission information.
  • the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10.
  • ProSe capability information may be included.
  • the ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal.
  • these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
  • the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far.
  • the information included in the message is not limited to this, and may be included together with the information included in the conventional tracking area update request message.
  • Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used when the UE 10 establishes a communication path with another UE.
  • the application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
  • the information for identifying the UE may be subscriber identification information such as IMSI, may be temporarily assigned identification information such as TEID, or may be application user identification information. Good.
  • the application permission information is identification information indicating whether or not the application server 20 is permitted to communicate using the application indicated by the application identification information, and the application identification information may be used.
  • the trigger for the UE 10 to transmit the tracking area update request message may determine the transmission timing based on a timer that is executed from the timing when the UE 10 in the idle mode transitions to the idle mode.
  • the timer that determines the interval at which the tracking area update request message is transmitted may be held in advance by the UE 10 and the timer value may be determined.
  • the ENB-A95 receives the tracking area update request message.
  • the eNB-A 95 is a base station device that has connectivity with the MME-A 90, and may be a base station device that belongs to a tracking area managed by the MME-A 90.
  • the eNB-A 95 is a base station device managed by the MME-A 90, and is a base station device belonging to the tracking area configured by the MME-A 90.
  • the eNB-A 95 may be a base station device different from the eNB 45 configured in the LTE AN80.
  • the tracking area to which the eNB-A 95 belongs and the tracking area to which the eNB 45 belongs may be different tracking areas.
  • each tracking area may be a tracking area managed by the MME 40, a tracking area to which the eNB-A 95 belongs is managed by the MME-A 90, a tracking area to which the eNB 45 belongs is managed by the MME 40, and so on. It may be managed by the position management device. Further, the configuration of the eNB-A 95 may be the same as the configuration of the eNB 45 already described, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.
  • the UE 10 periodically executes the tracking area update procedure.
  • the UE 10 transmits the tracking area update request message to the eNB 45 and executes the tracking area update procedure. Also good.
  • the eNB 45 is a base station device having connectivity with the MME 40, and may be a base station device belonging to a tracking area managed by the MME 40.
  • the eNB 45 is a base station device managed by the MME 40, and is a base station device belonging to the tracking area formed by the MME 40.
  • the UE 10 transmits a tracking area update request message to a base station apparatus different from the base station that previously transmitted the tracking area update request message by this tracking area update. Furthermore, the base station that has received the tracking area update request message is a base station that is managed by a location management device that is different from the previous base station.
  • the eNB-A 95 may transmit the tracking area update request to the MME-A 90 based on the reception of the tracking area update request from the UE 10 (S1004).
  • the message may also include UE 10 identification information, tracking area identification information, location management apparatus identification information, base station identification information identifying eNB-A 95, application identification information, and application user identification information. Good.
  • the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10.
  • ProSe capability information may be included in the message.
  • the ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal. In addition, these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
  • the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far.
  • the information included in the message is not limited to this, and may be included together with the information included in the conventional tracking area update request message.
  • Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used in a service in which the UE 10 establishes a communication path with another UE.
  • the application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
  • the ProSe code may be information transmitted when announcing that the UE is located in the vicinity to other UEs located in the vicinity. Further, it may be information received when monitoring that another UE located in the vicinity is located in the vicinity.
  • the ProSe code may be configured by combining application identification information, information for identifying a UE, and identification information for identifying an operator network such as a PLMN. Furthermore, the information for identifying the UE may be subscriber identification information such as IMSI, may be temporarily assigned identification information such as TEID, or may be application user identification information. Good.
  • the MME-A 90 may transmit a context request message to the MME 40 based on the reception of the tracking area update request message transmitted from the eNB-A 95 (S1006).
  • the MME-A 90 may lead and execute the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device by transmitting the context supply message.
  • the MME-A 90 may select a location management device that transmits a context request message based on information included in the received tracking area update request message. For example, the tracking area information and the position management device may be associated and managed in advance, the position management device associated with the received tracking area information may be selected, and the message may be determined to be transmitted to the MME 40. Further, the location management device may be selected from the information for identifying the location management device included in the tracking area update request message received from the eNB-A 95, and the context request message may be transmitted to the MME 40.
  • the context request message includes UE 10 identification information, tracking area identification information, location management apparatus identification information, eNB-A 95 identification base station identification information, application identification information, and application user identification information. May be.
  • the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10.
  • ProSe capability information may be included in the message.
  • the ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal.
  • these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
  • the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far. Furthermore, information for identifying the MME-A 90 may be included. The information included in the message is not limited to these, and may be included together with information included in the conventional context request message.
  • Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used by the UE 10 to establish a communication path with another UE.
  • the application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
  • the message may include a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20 registered by the UE 10.
  • the MME 40 may transmit a context response message to the MME-A 90 based on the reception of the context request message (S1008).
  • the MME 40 may manage the permission information 342 managed in association with the UE 10, and may transmit the message including the permission information 342.
  • the MME 40 may select and include the permission information 342 managed in association with the UE 10 based on the identification information of the UE 10 included in the context request message. Accordingly, the MME 40 may notify the MME-A 90 of permission information indicating that the UE 10 is permitted to use the service using the GRIP address, the GRIP address of the UE 10, and information related to the UE 10. As described above, the MME 40 may notify the MME-A 90 that the UE 10 is permitted to use the GRIP and that the UE 10 is currently acquiring the GRIP.
  • the MME 40 may transmit a context response including the identification information of the application server 20.
  • whether or not to include information for identifying the application server 20 in the context response message may be determined depending on the presence or absence of a flag for requesting the identification information of the application server 20 included in the context request message.
  • a context request message including a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20 is received, a message including the identification information of the application server 20 managed in association with the UE 10 held by the MME-A 90 is transmitted. To do.
  • the context request message does not include the flag for requesting the identification information of the application server 20
  • the message is transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
  • the context response may be transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
  • whether or not to include information for identifying the application server 20 may be determined depending on the presence or absence of application identification information or application user identification information included in the context request message.
  • the message including the identification information of the application server 20 managed in association with the UE 10 held by the MME-A 90 is transmitted.
  • the message is transmitted without including the message including the identification information of the application server 20.
  • the context response may be transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
  • the MME 40 uses the application server 20 based on either a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20, capability information indicating that the ProSe service can be enjoyed, or information indicating that a direct communication path has been established with a neighboring terminal. It may be transmitted including the identification information of the server 20, or it may be determined to include a combination of these information, such as including a plurality of such information, and transmitted including the identification information of the application server 20. Also good.
  • the MME-A 90 receives a context response from the MME 40.
  • the MME-A 90 stores the identification information of the application server 20 in the permission information 342.
  • the database to be stored is not limited to the permission information 342 but may be a database such as an MM context.
  • the identification information of the application server 20 may be stored in association with the identification information of the UE 10.
  • the MME-A 90 stores the context of the UE based on the reception of the context response message.
  • the MME-A 90 may perform processing for determining whether or not the GRIP address can be used. Hereinafter, the determination process will be described.
  • the MME-A 90 may acquire permission information for using the GRIP address of the UE and the GRIP address of the UE 10 from the message, and store them in the storage unit.
  • permission information for use of the GRIP address of the UE may be stored based on the policy.
  • the MME-A 90 moves from the MME 40 to the UE. Even if the permission information on the use of the GRIP address of the UE is acquired, the permission information on the use of the GRIP address of the UE may not be stored according to the operator policy.
  • the MME-A 90 can permit or deny the use of GRIP to the terminal device connected to the base station to which the MME is connected in accordance with the tracking area update procedure.
  • the MME-A 90 may transmit a response message to the UE 10 in response to the received tracking area update request.
  • the MME-A 90 may notify that the tracking area update has failed due to the transmission of the response message or that the use of GRIP is not permitted.
  • the MME-A 90 may transmit a tracking area update accept message as a response message, and may include information indicating these pieces of notification information in the message.
  • the PDN connection associated with the application executed using the GRIP address such as the PDN connection that executes communication using the GRIP address or the PDN connection established when the GRIP address is acquired, is deleted from the response message. You may transmit including the information which requests to do.
  • the MME-A 90 does not need to transmit a bearer update request message to the SGW 35.
  • the UE 10 may receive the response message and delete the PDN connection based on the information included in the response message.
  • the UE 10 uses a GRIP address such as a PDN connection that executes communication using the GRIP address or a PDN connection that is established when the GRIP address is acquired based on the response message.
  • the deletion may be executed by selecting the PDN connection associated with the application to be executed.
  • the UE 10 may delete a PDN connection, which may be performed by executing a PDN deletion procedure started by transmitting a PDN deletion request message to the MME-A 90.
  • the method of deleting the PDN connection is not limited to this, and other methods may be used.
  • the MME-A 90 may delete the PDN connection, which may be performed by executing a PDN deletion procedure that starts by transmitting a session deletion request message to the SGW 35.
  • the MME-A 90 may execute a process for determining whether or not the GRIP address can be used.
  • the MME-A 90 can restrict the use of the GRIP address of the UE connected to the base station to which the MME-A 90 is connected based on the determination process. Therefore, it is possible to control whether or not the GRIP address can be used on an area basis, such as an area composed of a plurality of base stations connected to the MEM-A 90.
  • the ME-A 90 does not execute the determination process itself when the use of GRIP is permitted for the terminal device connected to the base station to which the MME is connected in accordance with the tracking area update procedure.
  • the procedure in such a case will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the MME-A 90 transmits a context ACK to the MME 40, and completes the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device (S1010).
  • the MME-A 90 may transmit a bearer update request message to the SGW 35 (S1012). Accordingly, the MME-A 90 and the UE 10 may request to update the QoS information of the PDN connection established with the PGW 30. Moreover, you may request
  • the message may include PDN connection identification information or communication path identification information such as an IP connection established with another UE. Furthermore, you may transmit including the QoS information corresponding to a communication channel.
  • the SGW 35 receives the bearer request message, and the SGW 35 and the PGW 30 execute a bearer update procedure based on the reception of the bearer request message (S1014).
  • the bearer update procedure the QoS information of the PDN connection established by the UE 10 with the PGW 30 may be updated.
  • the SGW 35 After completing the bearer update procedure of the SGW 35 and PGW 30, the SGW 35 transmits a bearer update response message to the MME-A 90 (S1016).
  • the MME-A 90 transmits a tracking area update accept message to the UE 10 based on the reception of the bearer update response message (S1018).
  • the MME-A 90 may notify that the tracking area has been updated in response to the tracking area update request requested by the UE 10 by transmitting a tracking area update accept message.
  • the message may include the updated QoS information of the PDN connection established between the UE 10 and the PGW 30. Further, the MME-A 90 may transmit the message including information that can identify the application such as TFT and APN. Further, the MME-A 90 may transmit the message including both pieces of identification information.
  • the updated QoS information of the communication path of the IP connection established between the UE 10 and another UE may be included and transmitted.
  • information regarding the radio bearers of these communication paths may be included. For example, you may transmit including the information regarding the radio
  • the information regarding the radio resource may be allocated again by the MME-A 90 and notified in the message, or may be acquired from the information included in the bearer update response message from the SGW 35 and notified to the UE 10.
  • the tracking area update accept message may include the MME-A90 identification information.
  • the MME-A 90 may notify that the location management device has been relocated (MME-Relocation) by transmitting a message including the identification information of the MME-A 90 to the UE 10.
  • the UE 10 may receive the tracking area update accept from the MME-A 90 and transmit a tracking area update completion message to the MME-A 90 based on the reception. Along with this, the UE 10 completes the tracking area update procedure accompanied by the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device.
  • MME-Relocation relocation
  • the UE 10 may update information on the radio bearer based on information included in the tracking area update accept. For example, information related to radio resources of the communication path such as frequency and time information such as transmission timing may be updated. The information regarding the radio resource may be updated with respect to the PDN connection with the PGW 30.
  • the UE 10 can update the tracking area accompanied by the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device in the idle mode.
  • the MME-A 90 that is a location management device that manages the destination base station even if the location management device is rearranged due to the movement of the UE 10 in the idle mode, the MME 40 before the migration is Since the application information to be held can be acquired, the application server 20 is not changed, and the UE 10 can maintain transmission / reception of data using a GRIP address with another UE or the like.
  • the UE 10 may transmit the tracking area update request including request information for requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20.
  • This request information only needs to detect that the MME-A 90 needs to acquire the identification information of the application server 20, and may be a flag or the like requesting acquisition of the identification information of the application server.
  • the eNB-A 95 receives the tracking area update request message including the request information for requesting the MME-A 90 to acquire the identification information of the application server 20, and transmits the tracking area update request message to the MME-A 90. May be.
  • the tracking area update request message transmitted to the MME-A 90 includes request information requesting to acquire the identification information of the application server 20 in the tracking area update request message received from the UE 10. You may transmit including the received request information.
  • the MME-A 90 transmits a context to be transmitted to the MME 40 based on whether or not the received tracking area update request message includes request information for requesting the MME-A 90 to acquire the identification information of the application server 20.
  • the request message may include a flag for requesting identification information of the application server 20 that permits the UE 10 to communicate using the GRIP address.
  • the MME-A 90 uses the GRIP address for the UE 10 when the received tracking area update request message includes request information requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20.
  • the context request message including the flag requesting the identification information of the application server 20 that permits the received communication is transmitted to the MME 40.
  • the received tracking area update request message does not include request information for requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20, the application that permits the UE 10 to communicate using the GRIP address.
  • a context request message is transmitted to the MME 40 without including a flag for requesting identification information of the server 20.
  • the MME-A 90 may receive the identification information of the application server 20 from the MME 40 and notify the ProSe server that the location management device that manages the location of the UE-R 15 has been updated.
  • the UE 10 performs an authentication procedure for proximity terminal detection (ProSe Direct Discovery) provided as a ProSe service and communication using a direct communication path (ProSe Direct Communication).
  • the authentication procedure may authenticate each of the neighboring terminal detection and the communication using the direct communication path by different procedures, or may be authenticated by one authentication procedure.
  • the UE 10 executes an attach procedure and connects to the core network (S702). As a result, the UE 10 establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30.
  • the PDN connection is a communication path for transmitting / receiving data to / from the PDN 9.
  • the attach procedure may be executed as an initial procedure such as when the UE 10 is powered on.
  • the attach procedure starts when the UE 10 transmits an attach request to the MME 40.
  • the UE 10 may transmit the attach request including the APN and UE identification information such as IMSI.
  • the APN is not necessarily included in the attach request message, and may be notified from the UE 10 to the MME 40 by a control message in the attach procedure.
  • the MME 40 selects the PGW 30 based on the received APN, and determines the end point of the PDN connection for the UE 10. Furthermore, establishment of a PDN connection and connection to a core network are permitted, and an attach permission message serving as a response to the attach request message is transmitted to the UE 10.
  • the attach permission message may be transmitted directly from the MME 40 to the UE 10 or may be transmitted via the eNB 45 included in the LTE AN 80.
  • the MME 40 may notify that the UE 10 is permitted to connect to the core network by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the MME 40 may notify that the PDN connection has been established by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the attach permission message may be transmitted including the IP address associated with the PDN connection or the APN.
  • the MME 40 may transmit the attach permission message including the ProSe UE ID.
  • the MME 40 may transmit the message including the attach permission message ProSe UE ID based on the fact that the APN transmitted by the UE 10 in the attach procedure is the APN associated with the ProSe service.
  • the MME 40 may assign ProSe UE ID to the UE_A8.
  • you may acquire from HSS50.
  • the HSS 50 or the like may store the ProSe UE ID in the subscriber information in advance.
  • the UE 10 transmits a ProSe registration request message to the ProSe server (S706).
  • the ProSe server is a server device that manages communication between UEs having the ProSe function, and performs authentication when providing a ProSe service or the like.
  • the ProSe server may be configured to be included in the PDN 9 or may be independent of the PDN 9.
  • the UE 10 may request permission of communication using a neighboring terminal detection and a direct communication path by transmitting a ProSe registration request message. Further, it is possible to transmit information including information for identifying the neighboring terminal detection and the permission of communication using the direct communication path, and request permission for each of them.
  • the ProSe registration request may be transmitted using the PDN connection established by the attach procedure. Further, the ProSe registration request message may be transmitted using the IP address acquired in the attach procedure as the transmission source address.
  • the ProSe server that is the transmission destination of the ProSe registration request message may hold the information of the ProSe server associated with the home PLMN that is the contracted communication carrier in advance and use it as the transmission destination.
  • a list of communication carriers that can provide the ProSe service is held as a local PLMN, and further, a ProSe server associated with the local PLMN may be held and used as a transmission destination.
  • the local PLMN may be an arbitrary communication carrier determined based on a contract relationship with the Home PLMN, or may be a communication carrier operating in the same country as the Home PLMN.
  • the UE 10 may hold the PLMN ID for identifying the PLMN and the ProSe server in association with each other, and request authentication using the transmission destination.
  • the PLMN ID and ProSe server information may be obtained from the HomePLMN.
  • an inquiry may be made to the ProSe server of Home PLMN, and it may be acquired and retained by a response to the inquiry.
  • the ProSe server may receive the ProSe registration request, execute detection of neighboring terminals and authentication of communication using the direct communication path, and transmit a ProSe registration response (S708).
  • the ProSe server may send the ProSe registration response including the authentication result. Further, the ProSe server may transmit the message including identification information such as TFT and APN that can identify the application.
  • identification information such as TFT and APN that can identify the application.
  • the ProSe server may store information for authentication in association with the UE 10, and may determine whether the authentication result is acceptable or not based on the information.
  • the ProSe server may execute allocation of the ProSe UE ID based on the reception of the ProSe registration request (S707). Further, the ProSe UE ID may be included in the ProSe registration response and transmitted to the UE 10. The ProSe UE ID may be an ID associated with the UE 10, and the UE 10 may be used as information for identifying a terminal when detecting a neighboring terminal or notifying the neighboring terminal of itself. More specifically, the UE 10 may transmit the ProSe UE ID included in the announcement signal.
  • the UE10 receives the ProSe registration response and acquires the authentication result. Further, the ProSe UE ID included in the ProSe registration response may be acquired and held. As described above, the UE 10 may be authenticated by the ProSe server.
  • the UE 10 starts the PDN connectivity procedure (S710).
  • the procedure for obtaining the GRIP address by the PDN connectivity procedure may be equal to the PDN connectivity procedure of FIG. Detailed description is omitted here.
  • the UE 10 can acquire the GRIP address and store it in association with the GRIP address and the application ID.
  • a ProSe announcement procedure using a GRIP address will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the UE 10 that has acquired the GRIP address and associates the application ID with the GRIP address establishes a secure connection with the ProSe server, and transmits a discovery request to the ProSe server (S804).
  • the discovery request may include a ProSe application ID, a UE identifier such as IMSI or MSISDN, a command indicating a request for announcement, and an application ID.
  • the ProSe application ID is an identifier for identifying a terminal that can use ProSe.
  • the ProSe server receives a discovery request from the UE 10.
  • the ProSe server acquires the ProSe application ID and the UE identifier, the command indicating the request for announcement, the application ID, and the GRIP address included in the discovery request.
  • the ProSe server checks whether the management information of the UE 10 exists in the storage unit of the ProSe server. If there is no management information of the UE 10 in the storage unit of the ProSe server, the ProSe server confirms the authentication information of the UE 10 with the HSS 50 and creates new management information of the UE 10 (S806). As a result, the UE 10 has been authenticated for discovery by the ProSe server.
  • the ProSe server When the ProSe server authenticates the UE 10, it sends a discovery response to the UE 10.
  • the ProSe server may include a ProSe application code and a timer in the discovery response. Thereby, the ProSe server can instruct the UE 10 to maintain the valid state of the application identified by the ProSe application code until the timer count ends.
  • the UE 10 receives the discovery response from the ProSe server.
  • the UE 10 may acquire the ProSe application code and timer included in the message, and may make the announcement identified by the ProSe application code valid for the time managed by the timer.
  • the UE10 receives the discovery response from the ProSe server.
  • the UE 10 acquires a ProSe application code and a timer included in the discovery response.
  • the UE10 starts the announcement based on the reception of the discovery response (S810). Note that the UE 10 may start an announcement of discovery based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message.
  • the announcement signal transmitted by the UE 10 includes at least identification information indicating that the GRIP address has been acquired and application identification information such as an application ID.
  • the UE 10 and the neighboring UE different from the UE 10 that has received the announcement signal are detected that the UE 10 and the UE 10 can perform communication of the application identified by the application ID using the GRIP address.
  • the GRIP address acquired by the UE 10 may be used as identification information indicating that the GRIP address has been acquired.
  • the GRIP address can be used in the announcement function of ProSe.
  • the UE 10 will explain the initial state below.
  • the UE 10 obtains the authentication of the use of the application and the acquisition of the GRIP address from the application server 20 that provides the communication using the GRIP address by the authentication procedure to the application server 20.
  • the UE 10 requests acquisition of a conventional IP address in the PDN connectivity procedure, acquires a conventional local IP address, establishes a PDN connection, and realizes communication.
  • the UE 10 wants to switch to communication using the GRIP address, an IP address changing procedure for using the already acquired local IP address as the GRIP address will be described.
  • the UE 10 transmits a control message requesting the change of the IP address to the MME 40 using any of the control procedures, and the MME 40 authenticates the IP address change procedure of the UE 10 based on the received message.
  • the MME 40 requests the PGW 30 for authentication permission in the IP address change procedure, and when receiving the IP address authentication permission, transmits a response message to the IP address change request to the UE 10.
  • control procedure for requesting the change of the IP address is not particularly limited, but in the following, the method for extending the service request procedure initiated by the UE and the bearer change request procedure requested by the UE are expanded. Explain the method.
  • the initial state may be a state in which the UE 10a acquires an IP address by executing an attach procedure. Note that the specific attachment procedure is the same as the method already described, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the initial state is not limited to after the attach procedure is executed, and the UE 10a may execute the PDN connectivity procedure and obtain a conventional IP address. More specifically, the UE 10a transmits a PDN connectivity request to the core network including the APN and the PDN type, and a PDN including the APN, the PDN type, and the conventional IP address as a message response. A response to the connectivity request may be received from the eNB 45.
  • the UE 10 transmits a service request message to eNB 45 (S902).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
  • the UE 10a may implement a request to change the already acquired IP address to the GRIP address by transmitting the service request message. Note that the UE 10a may make such a request based on the fact that the application server 20 is authenticated by a registration procedure with the application server or the like. Further, the UE 10a may transmit the request message further including information identifying that it is authenticated.
  • the UE identification information may be any information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Also, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity).
  • S-TMSI SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
  • ENB 45 receives a service request message from UE 10.
  • the eNB 45 transfers the message to the MME 40 (S904).
  • the MME 40 receives a service request message from the eNB 45.
  • the MME 40 executes an authentication process based on the reception of the message.
  • the authentication information of the HSS 50 and the UE 10 is confirmed (S906).
  • the identification information of the UE 10 included in the message received by the MME 40 may be used for confirmation of the authentication information.
  • the authentication information may be management information that manages user information in association with permission information indicating whether to assign a GRIP address to the user.
  • the process may be stopped. Or you may notify that authentication information cannot be confirmed to UE10 via MME40 and eNB45. Alternatively, it may be notified that the change or assignment to the GRIP address is not permitted.
  • the MME 40 may execute an authentication process for changing to such a GRIP address based on an information element indicating an IP address change request included in the message.
  • the MME 40 transmits an initial context setting request message to the eNB 45 (S908).
  • the eNB 45 receives the initial context setting request message from the MME 40.
  • the eNB 45 performs a radio bearer establishment or change procedure between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 based on the reception of the message (S910).
  • the eNB 45 transmits an initial context setting response message to the MME 40 (S912).
  • the MME 40 receives the initial context setting response message from the eNB 45. Based on the reception of the message, the MME 40 transmits a bearer change request message to the PGW (S914). The MME 40 transmits a bearer change request message including identification information indicating that the IP address is changed to the GRIP address based on the result of the above-described authentication process such as confirming that the UE 10 can use the GRIP address. May be.
  • the identification information indicating that the IP address is changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the IP address of the UE 10 may be a GRIP address.
  • the PGW 30 receives a bearer change request message from the MME 40.
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address of the UE 10 is a GRIP address.
  • the PGW 30 stores the IP address of the UE 10 in the GRIP address management table 442 in the PGW 30 based on the notification of the IP address change of the UE 10 included in the message.
  • the PGW 30 transmits a bearer change response message to the MME 40 based on the reception of the bearer change request message (S916).
  • the message may include identification information indicating the change to the GRIP address.
  • the PGW 30 can deliver the packet received from the UE 10a with the changed IP address as the transmission source address to the PGW between different mobile communication network based on the reception of the bearer change request message.
  • the route setting such as may be executed.
  • the MME 40 receives a bearer change response message from the PGW 30. Based on the reception of the message, the MME 40 transmits an IP address change response message to the UE 10 as a response to the IP address change request included in the service request message (S918).
  • the MME 40 may include identification information for identifying the application, such as TFT or APN, in the message. Further, both pieces of identification information may be included in association with each other.
  • the IP address change response message may include information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, and notify the UE 10a that the address attribute change has been completed.
  • the UE 10 By receiving an IP address change response message from the MME 40, the UE 10 is notified that the change of the IP address has been authenticated by the MME 40, the management table stored in the storage unit of the PGW 30 has been changed, and the IP held by the UE 10
  • the address can be used as a GRIP address.
  • the UE 10 selects a corresponding GRIP address based on the application identification information, and transmits / receives application data identified by the application identification information using the selected GRIP address. it can.
  • the PGW 30 can handle the address of the UE 10 as a GRIP address and can transfer it to the destination.
  • IP address change procedure using bearer change request procedure from UE Furthermore, as a specific example of the IP address change procedure, a method using a bearer change procedure started from the UE will be described.
  • the initial state is a state in which the UE 10 is attached to the network, the registration procedure with the application server 20 is completed, and communication is performed using a conventional IP address. Description is omitted.
  • the UE 10 expands and executes the bearer change procedure, thereby changing the conventional IP address to the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10 may start an IP address change procedure using a bearer change request procedure triggered by movement or QoS change, or in conjunction with activation of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. You may start. Or you may use the trigger for starting the change procedure of the bearer started from the conventional UE.
  • UE10 transmits a bearer change request message to MME40 based on an above described trigger (S1102).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
  • the UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Also, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity).
  • S-TMSI SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity
  • the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
  • the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow.
  • the identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT.
  • the UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • a TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
  • the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
  • the message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer update request message such as bearer ID and QoS.
  • the MME 40 receives a bearer change request message from the UE 10.
  • a bearer resource instruction message is transmitted to the SGW 35 based on the identification information included in the message that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address (S1104).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
  • the UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
  • the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
  • the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow.
  • the identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT.
  • the UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • a TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
  • the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
  • the message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer resource instruction message such as bearer ID and QoS.
  • the SGW 35 receives the bearer resource message from the MME 40 and selects the PGW 30 based on the received bearer ID.
  • the SGW 35 transmits a bearer resource instruction message to the selected PGW 30 (S1106).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
  • the UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
  • the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
  • the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow.
  • the identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • the identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT.
  • the UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
  • a TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
  • the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
  • the message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer resource instruction message such as bearer ID and QoS.
  • the PGW 30 receives the bearer resource instruction message from the SGW 35.
  • the PGW 30 stores the conventional IP address used by the UE 10 in the GRIP address management table 442 stored in the storage unit 440. Change to a GRIP address.
  • the IP address of the UE 10 may be changed to the GRIP address by including the identification information of the application without including the identification information requesting to change the IP address.
  • the IP address of the UE 10 may be changed to a GRIP address by including application permission information.
  • the PGW 30 may execute path setting such that a packet having the changed IP address as a transmission source address can be delivered between different mobile communication carrier networks. .
  • processing such as enabling the bearer, disabling the bearer, or changing the bearer may be started.
  • the PGW 30 transmits a bearer establishment (update) message to the SGW 35 (S1108).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address.
  • the UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
  • identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the like.
  • the message may further include an information element included in a conventional bearer establishment (update) message such as QoS.
  • the SGW 35 receives a bearer establishment (update) message from the PGW 30. If the message includes identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, the SGW 35 transmits a bearer establishment (update) message to the MME 40 (S1110).
  • the message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address.
  • the UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
  • identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the like.
  • the message may further include an information element included in a conventional bearer establishment (update) message such as QoS.
  • the MME 40 receives a bearer update (establishment) request message from the SGW 35.
  • the MME 40 transmits an IP address change notification to the UE 10 as a response to the bearer change request received from the UE 10 (S1112).
  • the MME 40 may include a TFT or APN identifying the application in the message. Further, both pieces of identification information may be included.
  • the MME 40 may include identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address in the message.
  • the UE10 receives IP address change notification from MME40.
  • the received message includes identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address
  • the UE 10 can use the held IP address as the GRIP address.
  • the UE 10 selects a corresponding GRIP address based on the application identification information, and transmits / receives application data identified by the application identification information using the selected GRIP address. it can.
  • the PGW 30 can handle the address of the UE 10 as a GRIP address and can transfer it to the destination.
  • a program that operates in each device is a program that controls a CPU or the like (a program that causes a computer to function) so as to realize the functions of the above-described embodiments.
  • Information handled by these devices is temporarily stored in a temporary storage device (for example, RAM) at the time of processing, then stored in various ROM or HDD storage devices, and read and corrected by the CPU as necessary. • Writing is performed.
  • a recording medium for storing the program a semiconductor medium (for example, ROM, a non-volatile memory card, etc.), an optical recording medium / a magneto-optical recording medium (for example, DVD (Digital Versatile Disc), MO (Magneto Optical) Disc), MD (Mini Disc), CD (Compact Disc), BD, etc.), magnetic recording medium (eg, magnetic tape, flexible disk, etc.), etc.
  • a semiconductor medium for example, ROM, a non-volatile memory card, etc.
  • an optical recording medium / a magneto-optical recording medium for example, DVD (Digital Versatile Disc), MO (Magneto Optical) Disc), MD (Mini Disc), CD (Compact Disc), BD, etc.
  • magnetic recording medium eg, magnetic tape, flexible disk, etc.
  • the program when distributing to the market, can be stored in a portable recording medium for distribution, or transferred to a server computer connected via a network such as the Internet.
  • a server computer connected via a network such as the Internet.
  • the storage device of the server computer is also included in the present invention.
  • each device in the above-described embodiment may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration) which is typically an integrated circuit.
  • LSI Large Scale Integration
  • Each functional block of each device may be individually formed as a chip, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a chip.
  • the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor.
  • integrated circuit technology that replaces LSI appears due to progress in semiconductor technology, it is of course possible to use an integrated circuit based on this technology.
  • LTE and WLAN are described as examples of the radio access network, but they may be connected by WiMAX instead of WLAN.

Abstract

In order to clarify the method by which a UE acquires a globally reroutable IP address, in a PDN connectivity request, the UE requests acquisition of a globally reroutable IP address, and a globally reroutable IP address is acquired through the PDN connectivity accept.

Description

端末装置、MME、PGW、通信システムおよび通信制御方法Terminal device, MME, PGW, communication system, and communication control method
 本発明は、端末装置、MME、PGW、通信システムおよび通信制御方法等に関する。 The present invention relates to a terminal device, an MME, a PGW, a communication system, a communication control method, and the like.
 近年の移動通信システムの標準化活動を行う3GPP(The 3rd Generation Partnership Project)では、オールIP化を実現する、非特許文献1に記載のEPS(Evolved Packet System)の仕様化を行っている。3GPPではEPSに接続されるアクセスシステムを、LTE(Long Term Evolution)だけでなく、無線LANである場合も含めて検討している。 In recent 3GPP (The 3rd Generation Partnership Project) that conducts standardization activities for mobile communication systems, the specification of the EPS (Evolved Packet System) described in Non-Patent Document 1 is realized. In 3GPP, not only LTE (LongEPTerm Evolution) but also a wireless LAN is considered as an access system connected to EPS.
 更に、3GPPのEPSの仕様化の中で、非特許文献2に記載のProSe(Proximity based Service)について検討を行っている。ProSeは、通信端末であるUE(User Equipment)の間で近隣通信端末を検出する機能(discovery)や、UE間で、コアネットワークや基地局を介さない直接通信を確立する機能(direct communication)を提供するサービスの実現を目指している。 Furthermore, ProSe (Proximity based Service) described in Non-Patent Document 2 is being studied in the 3GPP EPS specification. ProSe has a function (discovery) for detecting neighboring communication terminals between UEs (User Equipment) as communication terminals and a function (direct communication) for establishing direct communication between UEs without using a core network or a base station. It aims to realize the services it provides.
 3GPPのEPSの仕様化の中では、非特許文献3に記載のeICBD(Enhancements for Infrastructure based data Communication Between Devices)についても検討を行っている。eICBDでは、P2P(Peer to Peer)などの普及に伴うアプリケーションの多様化や、様々なM2M(Machine to Machine)端末などによる端末の多様化に伴い、現在の通信形態に生じる課題を解決することを目的としている。eICBDでは、端末間の通信方法の一つとして直接通信にProSeを用いることを許可することが検討されている。 In the specification of 3GPP EPS, eICBD (Enhancements for infrastructure data Communication Between Devices) described in Non-Patent Document 3 is also being studied. In eICBD, it is possible to solve the problems that arise in the current communication mode due to the diversification of applications accompanying the spread of P2P (Peer to Peer) and the like, and the diversification of terminals such as various M2M (Machine to Machine) terminals It is aimed. In eICBD, as one of the communication methods between terminals, it is considered to permit the use of ProSe for direct communication.
 eICBDでは、異なる移動通信事業者(Mobile Operator)網に接続する端末間で、P2Pアプリケーションによる通信を行うため、globally routable IP address(以下、GRIPアドレス)を用いることがユースケースの一つとして考えられている。GRIPアドレスは、P2Pアプリケーションによる通信を開始しようとする各UEにより、各移動通信事業者に割り当てが要求される。 In eICBD, since a P2P application communicates between terminals connected to different mobile operator networks, it is considered as one use case to use globally routed IP address (hereinafter, GRIP address). ing. The GRIP address is requested to be assigned to each mobile communication carrier by each UE that intends to start communication by the P2P application.
 eICBDでは、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信サービスの要求条件が検討されている。GRIPアドレスは各移動通信事業者が、アプリケーションサーバに登録されているUEに割り当てることが非特許文献3に記載されている。しかし、UEのGRIPアドレスの取得方法は明確になっていない。 EICBD is studying requirements for communication services using GRIP addresses. Non-Patent Document 3 describes that each mobile communication carrier assigns a GRIP address to a UE registered in an application server. However, the method for obtaining the GRIP address of the UE is not clear.
 本発明は、このような事情を鑑みてなされたもので、その目的は、現在の手続きに、なるべく影響がないように、GRIPアドレスを取得する好適な手段を提供することである。 The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a suitable means for obtaining a GRIP address so as not to affect the current procedure as much as possible.
 本発明の端末装置は、MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信する送信部と、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信する受信部と、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、第1の識別情報の送信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得する記憶部と、を有することを特徴とする。 The terminal device of the present invention includes a transmission unit that transmits a PDN connectivity request message to a MME (Mobility Management Entity), and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP in a PDN connectivity request message. First identification information indicating that an address allocation is requested, and a reception unit that receives a PDN connectivity accept message from the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and a PDN connectivity accept message Includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and based on the transmission of the first identification information, the global router And having a storage unit that acquires Le IP address, the.
 本発明のMME(Mobility Management Entity)は、端末装置からPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを受信する受信部と、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置へ送信し、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージにグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信する送信部と、を有することを特徴とする。 The MME (Mobility Management Entity) of the present invention includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP in a receiving unit that receives a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from a terminal device, and a PDN connectivity request message. A PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and the PDN connectivity accept message includes at least A PDN connectivity network including an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, based on receiving the first identification information. And having a transmitter which transmits including Gurobari routable IP address to the concept message.
 本発明のPGW(PDN Gateway)は、端末装置のPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージの送信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGW(Serving Gateway)から受信する受信部と、セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当てる制御部と、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、セッション確立応答メッセージをSGWへ送信する送信部とを有し、セッション確立応答メッセージメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含める、ことを特徴とする。 The PGW (PDN Gateway) of the present invention includes a receiving unit that receives a session establishment request message from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on the transmission of a terminal device PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message, and a session establishment request message. Includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating a request for assignment of a globally routable IP address, and based on reception of the first identification information, a globally routable IP address And a transmission unit that transmits a session establishment response message to the SGW as a response to the session establishment request message. The session establishment response message message includes at least an APN and And the PDN type, include Gurobari routable IP address, characterized in that.
 本発明の端末装置は、MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信し、IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更することを要求する第1の要求メッセージをMMEまたは基地局装置に送信する送信部と、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、を含み、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信し、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、第1の要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージを受信する受信部と、応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更する記憶部と、を有することを特徴とする。 The terminal apparatus of the present invention transmits a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message to the MME (Mobility Management Entity) and sends a first request message requesting to change the IP address to a globally routable IP address. Alternatively, the transmission unit to be transmitted to the base station apparatus and the PDN connectivity request message include at least an APN and a PDN type, and a PDN connectivity accept message is received from the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message. The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and includes a first request message. A receiver for receiving a response message to chromatography di, based on the reception of the response message, and having a storage unit for changing the IP address to Gurobari routable IP address.
 本発明の端末装置の通信制御方法は、MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信するステップと、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信するステップと、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、第1の識別情報の送信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得するステップとを含めることを特徴とする。 The communication control method for a terminal device according to the present invention includes a step of transmitting a PDN connectivity request message to an MME (Mobility Management Entity), and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a global router in the PDN connectivity request message. Receiving a PDN connectivity accept message from the base station device as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and PDN connectivity accept The message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and based on the transmission of the first identification information, Wherein the inclusion of acquiring low Routable IP addresses.
 本発明のMME(Mobility Management Entity)の通信制御方法は、端末装置からPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを受信するステップと、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置へ送信するステップと、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、識別情報の受信に基づいて、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージにグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信するステップとを含めることを特徴とする。 The MME (Mobility Management Entity) communication control method of the present invention includes a step of receiving a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from a terminal device, and at least an APN, a PDN type, and a global router in the PDN connectivity request message. Transmitting a PDN connectivity accept message to the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message, and PDN connectivity accept The message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address. Wherein the inclusion of the step of transmitting including the connection Kuti Byi tee Gurobari routable IP address to accept message.
 本発明のPGW(PDN Gateway)の通信制御方法は、端末装置のPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージの送信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGW(Serving Gateway)から受信するステップと、セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当てるステップと、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めてセッション確立応答メッセージをSGWへ送信するステップとを含めることを特徴とする。 According to the PGW (PDN Gateway) communication control method of the present invention, a session establishment request message is received from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on transmission of a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message of a terminal device, and a session establishment The request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that a globally routable IP address assignment request is requested. Based on the reception of the first identification information, the globally routable A session establishment response message including at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address as a response to the session establishment request message. The characterized to include the steps of transmitting to the SGW.
 本発明の端末装置の通信制御方法は、MME(Mobility Management Entity)に少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプを含めてPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信するステップと、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めたPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信するステップと、IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更することを要求する第1の要求メッセージをMMEまたは基地局装置に送信するステップと、第1の要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージを受信するステップと、応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更するステップとを含めることを特徴とする。 The communication control method of the terminal device of the present invention includes a step of transmitting a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message including at least an APN and a PDN type in MME (Mobility Management Entity), and a response to the PDN connectivity request message. Receiving a PDN connectivity accept message including at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address from the base station apparatus, and requesting to change the IP address to a globally routable IP address. 1 request message to the MME or the base station apparatus, receiving a response message to the first request message, Based on the reception of the message, and wherein the inclusion of the step of changing the IP address to Gurobari routable IP address.
 本発明の通信システムは、少なくとも端末装置と基地局装置とMME(Mobility Management Entity)とSGW(Serving Gateway)とPGW (PDN Gateway)を含んで構成する通信システムであって、端末装置は、MMEにPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信し、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、MMEは、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを端末装置から受信し、PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGWへ送信し、セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、第1の識別情報とを含み、SGWは、セッション確立要求メッセージをMMEから受信し、セッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをPGWへ送信し、セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、第1の識別情報とを含み、PGWは、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGWから受信し、第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、端末装置にグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当て、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、セッション確立応答メッセージをSGWへ送信し、セッション確立応答メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信し、SGWは、セッション確立応答メッセージをPGWから受信し、セッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、MMEが送信するセッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、セッション確立応答メッセージをMMEに送信し、セッション確立応答メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信し、MMEは、セッション確立応答メッセージをSGWから受信し、セッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、MMEが送信するPDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局に送信し、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信し、基地局装置は、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージをMMEから受信し、セッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを端末装置に送信し、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信し、端末装置は、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信し、識別情報の送信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得することを特徴とする。 The communication system of the present invention is a communication system that includes at least a terminal device, a base station device, an MME (Mobility Management Entity), an SGW (Serving Gateway), and a PGW (PDN Gateway). A PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message is transmitted. The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that a globally routable IP address is requested to be allocated. , The MME receives the PDN connectivity request message from the terminal device, and based on the reception of the PDN connectivity request message, the MME sends a session establishment request message to S And the session establishment request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information, and the SGW receives the session establishment request message from the MME and is based on reception of the session establishment request message. The session establishment request message is transmitted to the PGW, and the session establishment request message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the first identification information. The PGW receives the session establishment request message from the SGW, On the basis of the reception of the identification information 1, a globally routable IP address is assigned to the terminal device, and a session establishment response message is transmitted to the SGW as a response to the session establishment request message. , PDN type, The SGW receives a session establishment response message from the PGW, and, based on the reception of the session establishment response message, the SGW sends a session establishment response message as a response to the session establishment request message. A response message is transmitted to the MME, and the session establishment response message is transmitted including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address. The MME receives the session establishment response message from the SGW, and establishes the session. Based on the reception of the response message, a PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station as a response to the PDN connectivity request message transmitted by the MME, and the PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted. Is transmitted including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address, and the base station apparatus receives the PDN connectivity accept message from the MME, and based on the reception of the session establishment response message, A PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the terminal device. The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address, and the terminal device transmits the PDN connectivity accept message. An accept message is received from a base station apparatus, and a globally routable IP address is acquired based on transmission of identification information.
 本発明によれば、従来のPDNコネクティビティ手続きを拡張し、UEは移動通信事業者からグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得することができる。 According to the present invention, the conventional PDN connectivity procedure is extended, and the UE can acquire a globally routable IP address from the mobile communication carrier.
移動通信システムの概略を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the outline of a mobile communication system. IP移動通信ネットワークの構成等を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the structure of an IP mobile communication network, etc. UEの機能構成を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the function structure of UE. アプリケーションサーバの機能構成を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the function structure of an application server. MMEの機能構成を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the function structure of MME. PGWの機能構成を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the function structure of PGW. アプリケーションサーバの認証手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the authentication procedure of an application server GRIPアドレスの取得方法を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the acquisition method of a GRIP address. GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the communication using a GRIP address. TAUに伴ったMME再割り当て手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the MME reassignment procedure accompanying TAU. ProSeサーバの認証手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the authentication procedure of a ProSe server ProSeのアナウンス手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the announcement procedure of ProSe サービスリクエストを用いたIPアドレスの変更手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the change procedure of the IP address using a service request UEから開始するベアラ変更手続きを用いたIPアドレス変更手続きを説明するための図であるIt is a figure for demonstrating the IP address change procedure using the bearer change procedure started from UE
 以下、図面を参照して本発明を実施する為に最良の形態について説明する。なお、本実施形態では一例として、本発明を適用した場合の移動通信システム等の実施形態について説明する。 Hereinafter, the best mode for carrying out the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, as an example, an embodiment of a mobile communication system or the like when the present invention is applied will be described.
 [1.第1の実施形態]
 以下、図面を参照しながら本発明の実施形態による無線通信技術について詳細に説明する。なお、本実施形態においては、GRIPアドレスとは、グローバルユニークなIPアドレスに限定されず、グローバルにルーティング可能なIPアドレスであればよい。例えば、GRIPアドレスはプライベートIPアドレスであってもよい。この場合、GRIPアドレスは、コアネットワークによってNAT(Network Access Transportation)機能を用いてグローバルユニークなIPアドレスに変換されるIPアドレスであってもよい。
[1. First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a wireless communication technique according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, the GRIP address is not limited to a globally unique IP address, and may be an IP address that can be routed globally. For example, the GRIP address may be a private IP address. In this case, the GRIP address may be an IP address that is converted into a globally unique IP address by using a NAT (Network Access Transportation) function by the core network.
 さらに、GRIPアドレスは、複数の移動通信事業者によって異なるコアネットワーク等の移動通信事業者網を構成している場合の、ある移動通信事業者網によって端末装置に割り当てたIPアドレスであり、さらに、IPアドレスを割り当てた移動通信事業者網から他の移動通信事業者網へルーティング可能なIPアドレスであってよい。このように、GRIPアドレスとは、ある移動通信事業者網に接続する端末装置が取得するIPアドレスであり、その端末装置が、他の移動通信事業者網に接続する端末装置と通信を実行する際に用いるIPアドレスであってよい。 Furthermore, the GRIP address is an IP address assigned to a terminal device by a certain mobile communication carrier network when a mobile communication carrier network such as a different core network is configured by a plurality of mobile communication carriers, The IP address may be an IP address that can be routed from the mobile carrier network assigned the IP address to another mobile carrier network. Thus, the GRIP address is an IP address acquired by a terminal device connected to a certain mobile communication carrier network, and the terminal device communicates with a terminal device connected to another mobile communication carrier network. It may be an IP address used at the time.
 もしくは、GRIPアドレスは、単一の移動通信事業者網に接続する端末間の通信に用いるIPアドレスであってもよい。 Alternatively, the GRIP address may be an IP address used for communication between terminals connected to a single mobile carrier network.
 また、本実施形態においては、端末装置は従来手法に基づいてGRIPアドレスではない従来のIPアドレスを取得してもよい。従来のIPアドレスとは、本実施形態を通して説明する端末装置をはじめとするIP移動ネットワークに含まれる装置によるGRIPアドレスに対する特別な処理を実行しないIPアドレスであってよい。また、従来IPアドレスは、単一事業者により運用されるIP移動通信ネットワーク内でのみルーティング可能なローカルルータビリティなIPアドレスであってよい。本実施形態では、こうしたIPアドレスを従来IPアドレスと表記する。 In this embodiment, the terminal device may acquire a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address based on a conventional method. The conventional IP address may be an IP address that does not execute a special process for the GRIP address by a device included in the IP mobile network including the terminal device described through the present embodiment. The conventional IP address may be a local routability IP address that can be routed only within an IP mobile communication network operated by a single operator. In this embodiment, such an IP address is expressed as a conventional IP address.
 また、本実施形態においては、端末装置はGRIPアドレスと従来IPアドレスを両方同時に保有してもよい。また、端末装置はIPアドレスを取得する際、GRIPアドレスの割り当てを要求するのか、もしくは従来IPアドレスの割り当てを要求するのかを明示してIPアドレスの割り当てをコアネットワークに要求し、いずれかのIPアドレスを取得してもよい。さらに、端末装置はアプリケーションを実行するなどして実際にユーザデータを送受信する際、GRIPか従来IPアドレスのいずれかを選択して使用しても良い。 In the present embodiment, the terminal device may have both the GRIP address and the conventional IP address at the same time. Further, when acquiring the IP address, the terminal device explicitly requests whether the IP address assignment is requested from the core network by requesting the GRIP address assignment or the conventional IP address assignment. An address may be acquired. Furthermore, when actually transmitting / receiving user data by executing an application or the like, the terminal device may select and use either the GRIP or the conventional IP address.
 [1.1.通信システムの概要]
 図1は、本実施形態における移動通信システムの概略を説明するための図である。本図に示すように、移動通信システム1は、UE(端末装置)10と、IP移動通信ネットワーク5と、アプリケーションサーバ20とから構成される。
[1.1. Overview of communication system]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of a mobile communication system in the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the mobile communication system 1 includes a UE (terminal device) 10, an IP mobile communication network 5, and an application server 20.
 IP移動通信ネットワーク5は、例えば、コアネットワークを含んで構成するネットワークであっても良いし、ブロードバンドネットワークであっても良い。また、ブロードバンドネットワークは、広帯域の通信を実現する有線アクセスネットワークであり、例えばADSL(Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line)や光ファイバー等によって構築される。ただし、これに限らず、ブロードバンドネットワークはWiMAX(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access)などの無線アクセスネットワークであっても良い。 The IP mobile communication network 5 may be, for example, a network that includes a core network or a broadband network. The broadband network is a wired access network that realizes broadband communication, and is constructed by, for example, ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Linear) or an optical fiber. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the broadband network may be a wireless access network such as WiMAX (Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access).
 UE10は、LTEやWLANまたは、WiMAXに接続する端末装置であり、3GPP LTEの通信インタフェースやWLANの通信インタフェース、WiMAXの通信インタフェースなどを搭載して接続することにより、IP移動通信ネットワーク5へ接続することが可能である。 The UE 10 is a terminal device connected to LTE, WLAN, or WiMAX, and is connected to the IP mobile communication network 5 by being mounted with a 3GPP LTE communication interface, a WLAN communication interface, a WiMAX communication interface, or the like. It is possible.
 アプリケーションサーバ20は、特定のアプリケーションの管理を行うサーバ装置であり、アプリケーションを使用するUEの認証等の管理機能を担う。例えば、アプリケーションサーバ20は、ProSeサーバであってもよい。ProSeサーバとは、近隣端末の検出などのProSeに関連する機能を提供するサービスに対して、UEの認証等の管理機能を持つサーバ装置である。 The application server 20 is a server device that manages a specific application, and has a management function such as authentication of a UE that uses the application. For example, the application server 20 may be a ProSe server. The ProSe server is a server device having a management function such as UE authentication for a service that provides a function related to ProSe such as detection of a neighboring terminal.
 次に、IP移動通信ネットワーク5の構成例を、図2を用いて説明する。図2のように、IP移動通信ネットワーク5は、UE10とPDN9とに接続している。PDN9は、UE10とパケットでデータを送受信するネットワークであり、例えば、インターネットやIMSやProSeに関するサービスなどの特定サービスを提供するサービス網である。 Next, a configuration example of the IP mobile communication network 5 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the IP mobile communication network 5 is connected to the UE 10 and the PDN 9. The PDN 9 is a network that transmits and receives data to and from the UE 10 in packets, and is a service network that provides specific services such as services related to the Internet, IMS, and ProSe, for example.
 IP移動通信ネットワーク5はUE10の契約する通信事業者が運用するネットワークであってよい。さらに、IP移動通信ネットワーク5はUE10のHome PLMNであってよい。なお、IP移動通信ネットワーク5には、UE10以外にも複数のUEが接続する事が可能である。 The IP mobile communication network 5 may be a network operated by a communication carrier with which the UE 10 has a contract. Furthermore, the IP mobile communication network 5 may be the Home PLMN of the UE 10. In addition to the UE 10, a plurality of UEs can be connected to the IP mobile communication network 5.
 IP移動通信ネットワーク5はコアネットワーク7と各無線アクセスネットワーク(LTE AN80、WLAN ANb75、WLAN ANa70)を含んで構成してもよい。さらに、コアネットワーク7と各無線アクセスネットワーク(LTE AN80、WLAN ANb75、WLAN ANa70)は接続されて構成されてよい。 The IP mobile communication network 5 may include a core network 7 and each radio access network (LTE AN80, WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70). Furthermore, the core network 7 and each radio access network (LTE AN80, WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70) may be connected.
 また、コアネットワーク7は、HSS(Home Subscriber Server)50、AAA(Authentication、Authorization、 Accounting)55、PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function)60、PGW(Packet Data Network Gateway)30、ePDG(enhanced Packet Data Gateway)65、SGW(Serving Gateway)35、MME(Mobile Management Entity)40により構成される。 The core network 7 includes an HSS (Home Subscriber Server) 50, an AAA (Authentication, Authorization, Accounting) 55, a PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Rules) 60, a PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) 30, an ePDG (enhanced Packet Packet Data Gateway). ) 65, SGW (Serving Gateway) 35, and MME (Mobile Management Entity) 40.
 また、図1を用いて説明したアプリケーションサーバ20は、PDN9に含まれて構成されてもよいし、PDN9と独立して、IP移動通信ネットワーク5に含まれて構成されてもよいし、コアネットワーク7に含まれて構成されても良い。 The application server 20 described with reference to FIG. 1 may be configured to be included in the PDN 9, or may be configured to be included in the IP mobile communication network 5 independently of the PDN 9, or may be configured as a core network. 7 may be included.
 無線アクセスネットワークは、複数の異なるアクセスネットワークで構成されてよい。それぞれのアクセスネットワークはコアネットワーク7に接続されている。さらに、UE10は無線アクセスネットワークに無線接続することができる。 The radio access network may be composed of a plurality of different access networks. Each access network is connected to the core network 7. Furthermore, the UE 10 can wirelessly connect to the radio access network.
 無線アクセスネットワークには、LTEアクセスシステムで接続できるLTEアクセスネットワーク(LTE AN80)や、WLANアクセスシステムで接続できるアクセスネットワーク(WLAN ANb75、WLAN ANa70)を構成することができる。 In the radio access network, an LTE access network (LTE AN80) that can be connected by an LTE access system and an access network (WLAN ANb75, WLAN ANa70) that can be connected by a WLAN access system can be configured.
 さらに、WLANアクセスシステムで接続可能なアクセスネットワークは、ePDG65をコアネットワーク7への接続装置として接続するWLANアクセスネットワークb(WLAN ANb75)と、PGW30とPCRF60とAAA55とに接続するWLANアクセスネットワークa(WLAN ANa75)とが構成可能である。 Further, the access network connectable by the WLAN access system includes a WLAN access network b (WLAN ANb75) for connecting the ePDG 65 as a connection device to the core network 7, and a WLAN access network a (WLAN for connecting the PGW 30, the PCRF 60, and the AAA 55). ANa75) can be configured.
 なお、各装置はEPSを利用した移動通信システムにおける従来の装置と同様に構成されるため、詳細な説明は省略する。以下、各装置の簡単な説明をする。 In addition, since each apparatus is comprised similarly to the conventional apparatus in the mobile communication system using EPS, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, each device will be briefly described.
 PGW30はPDN9とSGW35とePDG65とWLAN ANa70と、PCRF60とAAA55とに接続されており、PDN9とコアネットワーク7のゲートウェイ装置としてユーザデータ配送を行う。 The PGW 30 is connected to the PDN 9, the SGW 35, the ePDG 65, the WLAN ANa 70, the PCRF 60 and the AAA 55, and performs user data delivery as a gateway device of the PDN 9 and the core network 7.
 SGW35は、PGW30とMME40とLTE AN80とに接続されており、コアネットワーク7とLTE AN80とのゲートウェイ装置としてユーザデータ配送を行う。 The SGW 35 is connected to the PGW 30, the MME 40, and the LTE AN 80, and performs user data delivery as a gateway device between the core network 7 and the LTE AN 80.
 MME40は、SGW35とLTE AN80とHSS50に接続されており、LTE AN80を経由してUE10の位置情報管理と、アクセス制御を行うアクセス制御装置である。また、コアネットワーク7には、複数の位置管理装置が含まれて構成されてよい。例えば、MME40とは異なる位置管理装置としてMME40とは異なるMMEが含まれて構成されてもよい。ここで、MME40と異なるMMEをMME-A90とする。MME―A90はMME40と同様にSGW35とLTE AN80と、HSS50と接続されてよい。また、MME-A90は、MME40が接続するSGW35ではなく、コアネットワーク7に構成されるSGW35とはことなるゲートウェイに接続されてもよい。 The MME 40 is connected to the SGW 35, the LTE AN 80, and the HSS 50, and is an access control device that performs location information management and access control of the UE 10 via the LTE AN 80. The core network 7 may include a plurality of location management devices. For example, an MME different from the MME 40 may be included as a location management device different from the MME 40. Here, an MME different from the MME 40 is referred to as MME-A90. The MME-A 90 may be connected to the SGW 35, the LTE AN 80, and the HSS 50 in the same manner as the MME 40. Further, the MME-A 90 may be connected to a gateway different from the SGW 35 configured in the core network 7 instead of the SGW 35 to which the MME 40 is connected.
 また、MME-A90とMME40とが接続されてもよい。これにより、MME-A90とMME40は、UE10のコンテキストの送受信を行ってもよい。 Further, the MME-A 90 and the MME 40 may be connected. Thereby, MME-A90 and MME40 may perform transmission / reception of the context of UE10.
 HSS50はMME40とAAA55とに接続されており、加入者情報の管理を行う管理ノードである。HSS50の加入者情報は、例えばMME40のアクセス制御の際に参照される。 The HSS 50 is connected to the MME 40 and the AAA 55, and is a management node that manages subscriber information. The subscriber information of the HSS 50 is referred to at the time of access control of the MME 40, for example.
 AAA55は、PGW30と、HSS50と、PCRF60と、WLAN ANa70とに接続されており、WLAN ANa70を経由して接続するUE10のアクセス制御を行う。 AAA 55 is connected to PGW 30, HSS 50, PCRF 60, and WLAN ANa 70, and performs access control for UE 10 connected via WLAN ANa 70.
 PCRF60は、PGW30と、WLAN ANa75と、AAA55と、PDN9に接続されており、データ配送に対するQoS管理を行う。例えば、UE10とPDN9間の通信路のQoSの管理を行う。 PCRF 60 is connected to PGW 30, WLAN ANa 75, AAA 55, and PDN 9, and performs QoS management for data delivery. For example, QoS management of the communication path between the UE 10 and the PDN 9 is performed.
 ePDG65は、PGW30と、WLAN ANb75とに接続されており、コアネットワーク7と、WLAN ANb75とのゲートウェイ装置としてユーザデータの配送を行う。 The ePDG 65 is connected to the PGW 30 and the WLAN ANb 75, and delivers user data as a gateway device between the core network 7 and the WLAN ANb 75.
 また、図2(b)に示すように、各無線アクセスネットワークには、UE10が実際に接続される装置(例えば、基地局装置やアクセスポイント装置)等が含まれている。接続に用いられる装置は、無線アクセスネットワークに適応した装置が考えられる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, each radio access network includes a device (for example, a base station device or an access point device) to which the UE 10 is actually connected. As a device used for connection, a device adapted to a radio access network can be considered.
 本実施形態においては、LTE AN80はeNB45を含んで構成される。eNB45はLTEアクセスシステムでUE10が接続する無線基地局であり、LTE AN80には1又は複数の無線基地局が含まれて構成されてよい。 In this embodiment, the LTE AN 80 includes the eNB 45. The eNB 45 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected in the LTE access system, and the LTE AN 80 may be configured to include one or a plurality of radio base stations.
 WLAN ANa70はWLAN APa72と、GW(Gateway)74とが含まれて構成される。WLAN APa72はコアネットワーク7を運営する事業者に対して信頼性のあるWLANアクセスシステムでUE10が接続する無線基地局であり、WLAN ANa70には1又は複数の無線基地局が含まれて構成されてよい。GW74はコアネットワーク7とWLAN ANa70のゲートウェイ装置である。また、WLAN APa72とGW74とは、単一の装置で構成されてもよい。 The WLAN ANa 70 includes a WLAN APa 72 and a GW (Gateway) 74. The WLAN APa 72 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected with a WLAN access system that is reliable to the operator operating the core network 7, and the WLAN ANa 70 includes one or more radio base stations. Good. The GW 74 is a gateway device for the core network 7 and the WLAN ANa 70. Further, the WLAN APa 72 and the GW 74 may be configured by a single device.
 コアネットワーク7を運営する事業者とWLAN ANa70を運営する事業者が異なる場合でも、事業者間の契約や規約によりこのような構成での実現が可能となる。 Even if the operator operating the core network 7 and the operator operating the WLAN ANa 70 are different, it is possible to realize such a configuration by contracts and rules between the operators.
 また、WLAN ANb75はWLAN APb76を含んで構成される。WLAN APb76はコアネットワーク7を運営する事業者に対して信頼関係が結ばれていない場合に、WLANアクセスシステムでUE10が接続する無線基地局であり、WLAN ANb75には1又は複数の無線基地局が含まれて構成されてよい。 In addition, WLAN ANb75 is configured to include WLAN APb76. The WLAN APb 76 is a radio base station to which the UE 10 is connected in the WLAN access system when a trust relationship is not established with the operator operating the core network 7, and the WLAN ANb 75 includes one or more radio base stations. It may be configured to be included.
 このように、WLAN ANb75はコアネットワーク7に含まれる装置であるePDG65をゲートウェイとしてコアネットワーク7に接続される。ePDG65は安全性を確保するためのセキュリティ機能を持つ。 In this way, the WLAN ANb 75 is connected to the core network 7 using the ePDG 65, which is a device included in the core network 7, as a gateway. The ePDG 65 has a security function for ensuring safety.
 なお、本明細書において、UE10が各無線アクセスネットワークに接続されるという事は、各無線アクセスネットワークに含まれる基地局装置やアクセスポイント等に接続される事であり、送受信されるデータや信号等も、基地局装置やアクセスポイントを経由している。 In this specification, the fact that the UE 10 is connected to each radio access network means that the UE 10 is connected to a base station apparatus, an access point, etc. included in each radio access network. Also via a base station device or access point.
 [1.2.装置構成]
 続いて、各装置構成について図を用いて簡単に説明する。
[1.2. Device configuration]
Next, each device configuration will be briefly described with reference to the drawings.
 [1.2.1.UEの構成]
 図3(a)は、本実施形態におけるUE10の構成を示す。UE10は、制御部100に、LTEインタフェース部110と、記憶部140とがバスを介して接続されている。
[1.2.1. Configuration of UE]
Fig.3 (a) shows the structure of UE10 in this embodiment. In the UE 10, an LTE interface unit 110 and a storage unit 140 are connected to the control unit 100 via a bus.
 制御部100は、UE10を制御するための機能部である。制御部100は、記憶部140に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより各種処理を実現する。 The control unit 100 is a functional unit for controlling the UE 10. The control unit 100 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 140.
 LTEインタフェース部110は、UE10がLTE基地局に接続し、IPアクセスネットワークへ接続するための機能部である。また、LTEインタフェース部110には、外部アンテナ112が接続されている。 The LTE interface unit 110 is a functional unit for the UE 10 to connect to the LTE base station and connect to the IP access network. An external antenna 112 is connected to the LTE interface unit 110.
 記憶部140は、許可情報144と、GRIPアドレス情報146と、IPアドレス情報148とが記憶されている。 The storage unit 140 stores permission information 144, GRIP address information 146, and IP address information 148.
 許可情報144は、図3(b)に示すように、アプリケーションサーバ20から通知された許可情報であってよい。さらに、許可情報は、特定のアプリケーションの利用を許可することを示す情報であってよい。ここで、特定のアプリケーションとは、例えばGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーションであってよい。また、許可情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーション等の、アプリケーションの属性毎に識別されるアプリケーション群に対応づけた許可情報であっても良い。 The permission information 144 may be permission information notified from the application server 20 as shown in FIG. Further, the permission information may be information indicating that the use of a specific application is permitted. Here, the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode. The permission information may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. .
 このように、UE10は、アプリケーションの情報と許可情報を対応づけて記憶しても良い。 Thus, the UE 10 may store application information and permission information in association with each other.
 さらに、UE10は、許可情報をAPN(Access Point Name)と関連づけて記憶してもよい。例えば、図3(b)に示すように、許可情報144では、一つのUEに対して複数のAPNを記憶してもよい。APNはUE10に対する通信サービスや、UE10がコアネットワークに接続するサービス網を識別可能な識別情報であり、図3(b)に示す例では、APN1はUE10がGRIPアドレスを用いた通信サービス、またはGRIPアドレスを用いた通信サービスを提供するサービス網に対応する識別情報であり、APN2は、UE10がGRIPアドレスではない従来のIPアドレスを用いた通信サービス、またはGRIPアドレスではない従来のIPアドレスを用いた通信サービスを提供するサービス網に対応する識別情報であることを示している。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may store the permission information in association with the APN (Access Point Name). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 3B, the permission information 144 may store a plurality of APNs for one UE. The APN is identification information that can identify a communication service for the UE 10 and a service network to which the UE 10 is connected to the core network. In the example illustrated in FIG. 3B, the APN 1 is a communication service in which the UE 10 uses a GRIP address, or GRIP. Identification information corresponding to a service network that provides a communication service using an address, and APN2 uses a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address, or a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address. It indicates that the identification information corresponds to a service network that provides a communication service.
 GRIPアドレス情報146は、APNと、GRIPアドレスとアプリケーション識別情報を記憶することができる。図3(c)にGRIPアドレス情報146の一例を示す。図3(c)に示すように、UE10は、GRIPアドレス情報146にUEのAPN情報と、GRIPアドレスと、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信をすることができるアプリケーションを識別するアプリケーション識別情報とを関連づけて記憶してもよい。UE10は、GRIPアドレス情報146より、関連付けられたGRIPアドレスを用いて、特定のアプリケーションの通信を行ってもよい。 The GRIP address information 146 can store an APN, a GRIP address, and application identification information. An example of the GRIP address information 146 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3C, the UE 10 associates the GRIP address information 146 with the APN information of the UE, the GRIP address, and application identification information for identifying an application that can communicate using the GRIP address. You may remember. The UE 10 may perform communication of a specific application using the associated GRIP address from the GRIP address information 146.
 IPアドレス情報148は、GRIPアドレスではない従来IPアドレスを記憶する。図3(d)に、IPアドレス情報148の一例を示す。なお、UE10は、IPアドレスとAPNとIPアドレスとアプリケーション識別情報とを関連づけて記憶してもよい。 The IP address information 148 stores a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address. FIG. 3D shows an example of the IP address information 148. Note that the UE 10 may store the IP address, the APN, the IP address, and the application identification information in association with each other.
 UE10は、GRIPと従来IPアドレスを記憶することにより、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信のほかに、従来のIPアドレスを用いた通信も実行することができる。なお、UE10が、GRIPアドレス情報146と、IPアドレス情報148を同時に記憶している場合、UE10は、アプリケーションの通信時に、アプリケーションの識別情報またはAPNに基づいて、対応するIPアドレスを選択して利用してもよい。具体的な利用法方としては、UE10はユーザデータの送信において、選択したIPアドレスを送信元IPアドレスとして用いても良い。より具体的には、UE10が開始するサービスに用いるアプリケーションの識別情報がApp ID Aである場合、App ID Aのアプリケーションデータを送信において、UE10は、図3(c)に示す対応を基に送信するIPパケットの送信元IPアドレスとしてGRIPアドレスを選択してもよい。 The UE 10 can execute communication using a conventional IP address in addition to communication using a GRIP address by storing the GRIP and the conventional IP address. When the UE 10 stores the GRIP address information 146 and the IP address information 148 at the same time, the UE 10 selects and uses the corresponding IP address based on the application identification information or the APN at the time of application communication. May be. As a specific usage method, the UE 10 may use the selected IP address as the source IP address in the transmission of user data. More specifically, when the application identification information used for the service started by the UE 10 is App ID A, the application data of the App ID A is transmitted, and the UE 10 transmits based on the correspondence shown in FIG. A GRIP address may be selected as the source IP address of the IP packet to be transmitted.
 [1.2.2.アプリケーションサーバの構成]
 次に、アプリケーションサーバ20の構成につて、図4(a)を用いて説明する。図4(a)に示すように、アプリケーションサーバ20は、制御部200に、IP移動通信ネットワークインターフェース部210と、記憶部240とがバスを介して接続されている。
[1.2.2. Application server configuration]
Next, the configuration of the application server 20 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, in the application server 20, an IP mobile communication network interface unit 210 and a storage unit 240 are connected to the control unit 200 via a bus.
 制御部200は、アプリケーションサーバ20を制御するための機能部である。制御部200は、記憶部240に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより各種処理を実現する。 The control unit 200 is a functional unit for controlling the application server 20. The control unit 200 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 240.
 アプリケーションサーバ20は、記憶部240に、許可情報244とGRIPアドレス情報246とが記憶されている。 Application server 20 stores permission information 244 and GRIP address information 246 in storage unit 240.
 許可情報244は、図4(b)に示すように、登録されているUEに対して、アプリケーションの利用の許可情報を記憶することができる。図4(b)では、UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20で管理されるアプリケーションの利用が許可されている。 As shown in FIG. 4B, the permission information 244 can store application usage permission information for registered UEs. In FIG. 4B, the UE 10 is permitted to use an application managed by the application server 20.
 GRIPアドレス情報246は、図4(c)に示すように、アプリケーションの利用を認証したUE10から通知されたGRIPアドレスを記憶することができる。 As shown in FIG. 4C, the GRIP address information 246 can store a GRIP address notified from the UE 10 that has authenticated use of the application.
 なお、許可情報244は、特定のアプリケーションの利用を許可することを示す情報であってよい。ここで、特定のアプリケーションとは、例えばGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーションであってよい。また、許可情報244は、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーション等の、アプリケーションの属性毎に識別されるアプリケーション群に対応づけた許可情報であっても良い。 Note that the permission information 244 may be information indicating permission to use a specific application. Here, the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode. Further, the permission information 244 may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. good.
 このように、アプリケーションサーバ20は、端末装置毎に、アプリケーションの情報と許可情報を対応づけて記憶しても良い。 As described above, the application server 20 may store the application information and the permission information in association with each terminal device.
 [1.2.3.MMEの構成]
 次に、MME40の構成について説明する。MME40の装置構成を図5(a)に示す。図5(a)に示すように、MME40は、制御部300に、IP移動通信ネットワークインターフェース部320と、記憶部340とが、バスを介して接続されている。
[1.2.3. Configuration of MME]
Next, the configuration of the MME 40 will be described. The device configuration of the MME 40 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, in the MME 40, an IP mobile communication network interface unit 320 and a storage unit 340 are connected to the control unit 300 via a bus.
 制御部300は、MME40を制御するための機能部である。制御部300は、記憶部340に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより各種処理を実現する。 The control unit 300 is a functional unit for controlling the MME 40. The control unit 300 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 340.
 記憶部340には、許可情報342が記憶されている。許可情報342は、図5(b)に示すように、MME40が管理しているUEごとに許可情報を記憶することができる。さらに、UEが登録するアプリケーションサーバの識別情報を登録してもよい。または、MME40は、APNごとUEがGRIPアドレスを用いた通信の許可情報342を記憶してもよい。 Permission information 342 is stored in the storage unit 340. As shown in FIG. 5B, the permission information 342 can store the permission information for each UE managed by the MME 40. Further, identification information of an application server registered by the UE may be registered. Or MME40 may memorize | store the permission information 342 of communication for which UE used the GRIP address for every APN.
 また、MME40の代わりにHSS50が、UEの許可情報342を管理してもよい。この場合、HSS50はUEの識別子と対応付けて許可情報342を記憶してもよく、APNごとに登録情報を記憶してもよい。 Further, the HSS 50 may manage the permission information 342 of the UE instead of the MME 40. In this case, the HSS 50 may store the permission information 342 in association with the identifier of the UE, or may store registration information for each APN.
 なお、許可情報342は、特定のアプリケーションの利用を許可することを示す情報であってよい。ここで、特定のアプリケーションとは、例えばGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーションであってよい。また、許可情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションや、P2Pの通信形態によって通信を行うアプリケーション等の、アプリケーションの属性毎に識別されるアプリケーション群に対応づけた許可情報であっても良い。 Note that the permission information 342 may be information indicating permission to use a specific application. Here, the specific application may be, for example, an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication in a P2P communication mode. The permission information may be permission information associated with an application group identified for each application attribute, such as an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or an application that performs communication according to a P2P communication mode. .
 このように、MME40は、端末装置毎に、アプリケーションの情報と許可情報を対応づけて記憶しても良い。 Thus, the MME 40 may store the application information and the permission information in association with each terminal device.
 さらに、MME40は、許可情報をAPN(Access Point Name)と関連づけて記憶してもよい。例えば、許可情報342では、一つのUEに対して複数のAPNを記憶してもよい。APNはUE10に対する通信サービスやUE10がコアネットワークを介して接続するサービス網に対応する識別情報であり、APN1はUE10がGRIPアドレスを用いた通信サービス、またはGRIPアドレスを用いた通信サービスを提供するサービス網に対応する識別情報であり、APN2は、UE10がGRIPアドレスではない従来のIPアドレスを用いた通信サービス、またはGRIPアドレスではない従来のIPアドレスを用いた通信サービスを提供するサービス網に対応する識別情報であることを示している。 Further, the MME 40 may store the permission information in association with the APN (Access Point Name). For example, in the permission information 342, a plurality of APNs may be stored for one UE. APN is a communication service for UE 10 and identification information corresponding to a service network to which UE 10 is connected via a core network. APN 1 is a service for UE 10 to provide a communication service using a GRIP address or a communication service using a GRIP address. This is identification information corresponding to the network, and the APN 2 corresponds to a service network in which the UE 10 provides a communication service using a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address or a communication service using a conventional IP address that is not a GRIP address. This indicates identification information.
 [1.2.4.PGWの構成]
 次に、PGW30の構成について説明する。PGW30の装置構成を図6(a)に示す。図6(a)に示すように、PGW30は、制御部400に、IP移動通信ネットワークインターフェース部420と記憶部440とがバスを介して接続されている。
[1.2.4. Configuration of PGW]
Next, the configuration of the PGW 30 will be described. The apparatus configuration of the PGW 30 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the PGW 30, an IP mobile communication network interface unit 420 and a storage unit 440 are connected to the control unit 400 via a bus.
 制御部400は、PGW30を制御するための機能部である。制御部400は、記憶部440に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行することにより各種処理を実現する。 The control unit 400 is a functional unit for controlling the PGW 30. The control unit 400 implements various processes by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit 440.
 記憶部440は、GRIPアドレス管理表を記憶することができる。GRIPアドレス管理表は図6(b)に示すように、PGWが割り当てた各UEのGRIPアドレスを管理することができる。 The storage unit 440 can store a GRIP address management table. As shown in FIG. 6B, the GRIP address management table can manage the GRIP address of each UE assigned by the PGW.
 なお、PGW30は、UE10から受信したユーザデータが含まれるIPパケットのIPヘッダを確認し、送信元IPアドレスがGRIPアドレスであれば宛先に転送し、そうでなければ、パケットの破棄や、パケットの転送を停止するなどの処理を実行してもよい。 Note that the PGW 30 confirms the IP header of the IP packet including the user data received from the UE 10 and forwards it to the destination if the source IP address is a GRIP address. Otherwise, the packet is discarded or the packet Processing such as stopping the transfer may be executed.
 [1.3.処理の説明]
 次に、UEがGRIPアドレスを取得する処理について説明する。以下に、UE10がアプリケーションサーバ20を探索し、アプリケーションサーバ20へ認証要求を送信し、応答を受信するまでの認証等の手続きと、PDNコネクティビティ手続きを拡張したGRIPアドレスの取得手続きについて説明する。
[1.3. Explanation of processing]
Next, processing in which the UE acquires a GRIP address will be described. In the following, a procedure for authentication until the UE 10 searches for the application server 20, transmits an authentication request to the application server 20, and receives a response, and a procedure for acquiring a GRIP address by extending the PDN connectivity procedure will be described.
 [1.3.1.アプリケーションサーバへの登録手続き]
 図7を用いて、UE10からアプリケーションサーバ20への登録手続きを説明する。
[1.3.1. Application server registration procedure]
A registration procedure from the UE 10 to the application server 20 will be described with reference to FIG.
 まず、UE10はアタッチ手続きを実行し、コアネットワークに接続する(S502)。結果、UE10はPGW30との間にPDNコネクションを確立する。PDNコネクションはPDN9との間でデータを送受信するための通信路である。アタッチ手続きはUE10の電源投入時など、初期手続きとして実行されて良い。 First, the UE 10 executes an attach procedure and connects to the core network (S502). As a result, the UE 10 establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30. The PDN connection is a communication path for transmitting / receiving data to / from the PDN 9. The attach procedure may be executed as an initial procedure such as when the UE 10 is powered on.
 より具体的にはアタッチ手続きは、UE10がMME40にアタッチ要求を送信して開始する。アタッチ要求には、APNや、IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity)などのUEの識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。APNはアタッチ要求メッセージに必ずしも含まれる必要はなく、アタッチ手続き内の制御メッセージによってUE10からMME40に通知されてもよい。なお、ここで送信するAPNは、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNではなくてよい。もしくは、APNは、GRIPアドレスの割り当てを禁止する許可情報と対応づけられたAPNであってよい。したがって、アタッチ手続きでAPNを送信してUE10が取得するIPアドレスは、GRIPアドレスではなく、従来IPアドレスであってよい。 More specifically, the attach procedure starts when the UE 10 transmits an attach request to the MME 40. The attach request may be transmitted by including UE identification information such as APN or IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity). The APN is not necessarily included in the attach request message, and may be notified from the UE 10 to the MME 40 by a control message in the attach procedure. The APN transmitted here may not be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using a GRIP address. Alternatively, the APN may be an APN associated with permission information that prohibits assignment of a GRIP address. Therefore, the IP address acquired by the UE 10 by transmitting the APN in the attach procedure may be a conventional IP address instead of the GRIP address.
 MME40は、受信したUEの識別情報またはAPNに基づいて、許可情報を確認する。つまり、図5(b)に示すようにUEの識別情報に許可情報が対応している場合は、UEの識別情報を許可情報の確認に用いる。UE10の許可情報が確認できたら、MME40は受信したAPNに基づいてPGW30を選択し、UE10に対するPDNコネクションの端点を決定する。さらに、PDNコネクションの確立や、コアネットワークへの接続を許可し、アタッチ要求メッセージに対する応答となるアタッチ許可メッセージをUE10に送信する。なお、アタッチ許可メッセージは、MME40から直接UE10に送信されてもよいし、LTE AN80に含まれるeNB45を介して送信されてもよい。 The MME 40 confirms the permission information based on the received UE identification information or APN. That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the permission information corresponds to the identification information of the UE, the identification information of the UE is used for confirmation of the permission information. If the permission information of UE10 can be confirmed, MME40 will select PGW30 based on received APN, and will determine the end point of the PDN connection with respect to UE10. Furthermore, establishment of a PDN connection and connection to a core network are permitted, and an attach permission message serving as a response to the attach request message is transmitted to the UE 10. The attach permission message may be transmitted directly from the MME 40 to the UE 10 or may be transmitted via the eNB 45 included in the LTE AN 80.
 また、MME40は、アタッチ許可メッセージの送信により、UE10がコアネットワーク接続を許可されたこと通知してもよい。また、MME40は、アタッチ許可メッセージの送信により、PDNコネクションを確立したことを通知してもよい。さらに、アタッチ許可メッセージには、PDNコネクションに対応づけられたIPアドレスや、APNを含めて送信してもよい。さらに、IPアドレスに対応したTFT(Traffic Flow Template)等の、通信フローやアプリケーションを識別する識別情報をメッセージに含めて送信してもよい。 Further, the MME 40 may notify that the UE 10 is permitted to connect to the core network by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the MME 40 may notify that the PDN connection has been established by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the attach permission message may be transmitted including the IP address associated with the PDN connection or the APN. Further, identification information for identifying a communication flow or application such as a TFT (Traffic Flow Template) corresponding to the IP address may be included in the message and transmitted.
 以上の手続きにより、UE10は従来IPアドレスをコアネットワークから取得し、従来IPアドレスを用いた通信を実行可能となる。
UE10は、従来IPアドレス取得後、GRIPを取得するために、アプリケーションサーバへの登録手続きを実行してもよい。
Through the above procedure, the UE 10 can acquire the conventional IP address from the core network and execute communication using the conventional IP address.
UE10 may perform the registration procedure to an application server, in order to acquire GRIP, after acquiring a conventional IP address.
 以下に、アプリケーションサーバへの登録手続きを説明する。まず、UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20を探索し、探索したアプリケーションサーバ20とセキュアな通信を確保する(S504)。なお、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10がGRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションに対応するアプリケーションサーバであってよい。さらに、アプリケーションサーバ20は、登録手続きにおいて、UE10に対してアプリケーションの利用に対する認証や、UE10のGRIPの取得に対する承認等の処理を行っても良い。 The following describes the registration procedure for the application server. First, the UE 10 searches for the application server 20 and secures secure communication with the searched application server 20 (S504). The application server 20 may be an application server corresponding to an application with which the UE 10 communicates using a GRIP address. Further, in the registration procedure, the application server 20 may perform processing such as authentication for use of the application to the UE 10 and approval for acquisition of the GRIP of the UE 10.
 なお、UE10がアプリケーションサーバ20を探索する方法は、例えば、UE10は予めアプリケーションサーバのFQDN(Fully Qualified Domain Name)等のアプリケーションサーバの識別情報を保持しておき、UE10はその識別情報をもとにDNS(Domain Name System)サーバへ問い合わせを行う制御情報を送信し、制御情報の応答とともにアプリケーションサーバのIPアドレスを取得するなどにより、アプリケーションサーバ20を探索することができる。なお、アプリケーションサーバ20の探索方法はこれに限定されるものではなく、予めUE10が記憶するなど、他の方法を用いて探索しても良い。 The UE 10 searches for the application server 20 by, for example, pre-holding application server identification information such as FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) of the application server, and the UE 10 based on the identification information. The application server 20 can be searched by transmitting control information for making an inquiry to a DNS (Domain Name System) server and acquiring the IP address of the application server together with a response to the control information. In addition, the search method of the application server 20 is not limited to this, You may search using other methods, such as UE10 memorize | stored previously.
 また、UE10とアプリケーションサーバ20間にセキュアな通信路を確立する方法としてIPSecを用いてもよい。通信路の確立方法もこれに特に限定されず、UE10とアプリケーションサーバ20間でセキュアな通信路が確立できればよい。 Also, IPSec may be used as a method for establishing a secure communication path between the UE 10 and the application server 20. The communication path establishment method is not particularly limited to this, and it is sufficient that a secure communication path can be established between the UE 10 and the application server 20.
 次に、UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20へ、UE10がGRIPアドレスを用いて通信するアプリケーションを利用することに対する認証の要求を送信する(S506)。この要求には、従来の要求と同様に、特定のアプリケーション利用の登録要求に加え、GRIPアドレスの割当の要求が含まれる。つまり、UE10は認証要求メッセージの送信により、アプリケーションサーバ20に、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う特定のアプリケーションの利用に対する認証と、GRIPアドレスの割り当てと、を要求してよい。なお、この要求は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションが予め決定している場合等では、こうした特定のアプリケーションの利用に対する認証の要求であってよい。 Next, the UE 10 transmits to the application server 20 an authentication request for using the application that the UE 10 communicates with using the GRIP address (S506). This request includes a request for assigning a GRIP address in addition to a registration request for using a specific application, as in the conventional request. That is, the UE 10 may request the application server 20 to authenticate use of a specific application that performs communication using the GRIP address and to assign a GRIP address by transmitting an authentication request message. This request may be an authentication request for the use of such a specific application when an application that performs communication using the GRIP address is determined in advance.
 具体的には、アプリケーションサーバ20への認証要求には、UE10の位置情報や、UE10の識別情報を含めてもよい。UEの位置情報には、LTE基地局装置のCell IDや、TAI(Tracking Area ID)や、GPS(Global Positioning System)の情報を含めてもよい。 Specifically, the authentication request to the application server 20 may include the location information of the UE 10 and the identification information of the UE 10. The location information of the UE may include Cell ID of the LTE base station apparatus, TAI (Tracking Area ID), and GPS (Global Positioning System) information.
 アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10から認証要求を受信し、受信に基づき認証応答をUE10に送信する(S508)。アプリケーションサーバ20は、認証応答に、認証の結果を示す認証情報を含めてもよい。また、アプリケーションサーバ20は、認証応答に、TFTやAPNなど、アプリケーションを識別できる情報を含めてもよい。また、この両方を含めてもよい。 The application server 20 receives the authentication request from the UE 10 and transmits an authentication response to the UE 10 based on the reception (S508). The application server 20 may include authentication information indicating an authentication result in the authentication response. Further, the application server 20 may include information that can identify the application, such as a TFT and an APN, in the authentication response. Moreover, you may include both of these.
 UE10は、認証要求メッセージの応答として、認証応答を示す制御メッセージを受信する。UE10は、制御メッセージに含まれる認証情報を取得してよい。 The UE 10 receives a control message indicating an authentication response as a response to the authentication request message. The UE 10 may acquire authentication information included in the control message.
 なお、アプリケーションサーバ20は、ユーザ情報と許可情報を予め対応づけて管理しておき、こうした管理情報に基づいて認証要求を送信するUE10に対する認証結果を決定しても良い。 Note that the application server 20 may manage user information and permission information in association with each other in advance, and may determine an authentication result for the UE 10 that transmits an authentication request based on such management information.
 UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20から認証要求メッセージの応答として、認証応答メッセージを受信する。ここで、認証応答メッセージに含まれる情報を記憶してもよい。さらに、UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20に認証されたことを示すメッセージの受信に基づいてGRIPアドレスを取得する手続きを開始してもよい。具体的なGRIPアドレス取得手続きとして、UE10は、GRIPアドレスの要求含めたPDNコネクティビティ手続きを開始してもよい(S510)。 UE 10 receives an authentication response message as a response to the authentication request message from application server 20. Here, information included in the authentication response message may be stored. Further, the UE 10 may start a procedure for acquiring a GRIP address based on reception of a message indicating that the application server 20 has authenticated. As a specific GRIP address acquisition procedure, the UE 10 may start a PDN connectivity procedure including a request for a GRIP address (S510).
 [1.3.2.PDNコネクティビティ手続きに伴ったGRIPアドレス割り当て]
 図8を用いて、図7のPDNコネクティビティ手続き(S510)の詳細について説明する。UE10は、MME40にPDNコネクティビティ要求を送信する(S602)。PDNコネクティビティ要求には、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報とが含まれる。また、PDNコネクティビティ要求に、アプリケーションサーバ20から受信した、アプリケーションを利用することに対する認証情報を含めてもよい。
[1.3.2. GRIP address assignment with PDN connectivity procedure]
Details of the PDN connectivity procedure (S510) of FIG. 7 will be described with reference to FIG. The UE 10 transmits a PDN connectivity request to the MME 40 (S602). The PDN connectivity request includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Further, the authentication information for using the application received from the application server 20 may be included in the PDN connectivity request.
 ここで、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報はAPNであってもよい。なお、ここで送信するAPNは、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNであってよい。UE10は、こうしたAPNを送信するPDNコネクティビィティ手続きを行うことにより、GRIPアドレスの割り当てを要求してもよい。また、UE10が複数APNを保持している場合には、GRIPアドレスを取得するために、こうしたAPNを選択してPDNコネクティビィティ要求メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。もしくは、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報をPDNタイプに含めてもよい。従来のPDNタイプはIPv4アドレス、IPv6アドレス、もしくはその両方を識別することができたが、本実施形態におけるPDNタイプは、これらに加えてGRIPアドレスのIPv4アドレス、GRIPアドレスのIPv6アドレス、さらにはGRIPアドレスの両方のアドレスを識別する情報であってもよい。なお、UE10がGRIPアドレスの取得を要求する場合には、UE10は、GRIPアドレスのIPv6アドレスを示すPDPタイプ等を含めてPDNコネクティビィティ要求を送信して、GRIPアドレスを要求してもよい。 Here, the identification information indicating that the GRIP address is requested may be an APN. Note that the APN transmitted here may be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address. The UE 10 may request assignment of a GRIP address by performing a PDN connectivity procedure for transmitting such an APN. Further, when the UE 10 holds a plurality of APNs, such an APN may be selected and transmitted in a PDN connectivity request message in order to acquire a GRIP address. Alternatively, identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested may be included in the PDN type. The conventional PDN type was able to identify an IPv4 address, an IPv6 address, or both, but in addition to these, the PDN type in this embodiment is an IPv4 address of a GRIP address, an IPv6 address of a GRIP address, and further a GRIP It may be information that identifies both addresses. When the UE 10 requests acquisition of a GRIP address, the UE 10 may request a GRIP address by transmitting a PDN connectivity request including a PDP type indicating the IPv6 address of the GRIP address.
 なお、これらに限らず、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報には、フラグ等を用いてもよい。 Note that the present invention is not limited thereto, and a flag or the like may be used as identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested.
 MME40はUE10からPDNコネクティビティ要求を受信する。MME40は、PDNコネクティビティ要求に含まれる、APNと、PDNタイプとGRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報を受信してもよい。MME40は、PDNコネクティビティ要求に含まれる受信したAPNに基づいて、SGW35とPGW30を決定する。これにより、UE10とPDN9との間の通信路における中継装置であるゲートウェイを決定する。 The MME 40 receives the PDN connectivity request from the UE 10. The MME 40 may receive identification information indicating that an APN, a PDN type, and a GRIP address are requested, which are included in the PDN connectivity request. The MME 40 determines the SGW 35 and the PGW 30 based on the received APN included in the PDN connectivity request. Thereby, the gateway which is a relay apparatus in the communication path between UE10 and PDN9 is determined.
 次に、MME40は、セッション確立要求をSGW35に送信する(S604)。MME40は、セッション確立要求に、APN、PDNタイプ、PGW30を識別する情報、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報、を含めて送信してもよい。また、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報としてAPNを用いてもよい。 Next, the MME 40 transmits a session establishment request to the SGW 35 (S604). The MME 40 may transmit the session establishment request including the APN, the PDN type, information for identifying the PGW 30, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Further, APN may be used as identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested.
 なお、MME40は、ユーザ情報と、ユーザにGRIPアドレスの割り当てるかを示す許可情報を予め対応づけて管理しておき、こうした管理情報に基づいてGRIPアドレスの割り当ての認証を行い、認証の結果に基づいてセッション確立要求を送信してもよい。具体的には、UE10にGRIPアドレスの割り当てを許可した場合には、SGW35にセッション確立要求を送信する。また、割り当てを許可しない場合には、MME40は、PDNコネクティビィティ要求に対する応答をUE10へ送信し、GRIPアドレスの割り当てを行わないことや、PDNコネクションの確立を許可しないこと等を通知してもよい。また、MME40は、eNB45を介してUE10に応答メッセージを送信してもよい。 The MME 40 manages user information and permission information indicating whether to assign a GRIP address to the user in advance, performs authentication of GRIP address assignment based on the management information, and based on the authentication result. A session establishment request may be transmitted. Specifically, when the UE 10 is permitted to assign a GRIP address, a session establishment request is transmitted to the SGW 35. In addition, when the allocation is not permitted, the MME 40 transmits a response to the PDN connectivity request to the UE 10 and notifies that the GRIP address is not allocated or the establishment of the PDN connection is not permitted. Good. Moreover, MME40 may transmit a response message to UE10 via eNB45.
 なお、ユーザにGRIPアドレスの割り当ての要否を示す許可情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNを用いた接続をUE10aに許可するかを示す情報であってもよいし、ユーザやUE10aに対応づけて管理する、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスを許容するかどうかを示す加入者情報であってよい。 The permission information indicating whether the user needs to assign a GRIP address includes the UE 10a indicating a connection using an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address. Whether or not to allow applications that communicate using the GRIP address and communication services that communicate using the GRIP address, managed in association with the user or the UE 10a. May be subscriber information.
 なお、MME40は、セッション確立要求の送信により、UE10とPGW30との間のPDNコネクションの確立を要求してもよく、GRIPアドレスを要求してもよい。 Note that the MME 40 may request establishment of a PDN connection between the UE 10 and the PGW 30 by transmitting a session establishment request, or may request a GRIP address.
 SGW35は、MMEからセッション確立要求を受信する。SGW35は、セッション確立要求に含まれるAPNと、PDNタイプと、PGWの識別情報、GRIPアドレスの要求する事を示す識別情報を受信してもよい。 The SGW 35 receives a session establishment request from the MME. The SGW 35 may receive the APN included in the session establishment request, the PDN type, the PGW identification information, and the identification information indicating that the GRIP address is requested.
 さらに、SGW35はPGW30にセッション確立要求を送信する(S606)。SGW35が送信するセッション確立要求には、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、PGWの識別情報と、GRIPアドレスを要求する事を示す識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。これにより、SGW35は、PGW30に、UE10とPGW30との間のPDNコネクションの確立を要求してもよく、UE10にGRIPアドレスを割り当てることを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, the SGW 35 transmits a session establishment request to the PGW 30 (S606). The session establishment request transmitted by the SGW 35 may include at least APN, PDN type, PGW identification information, and identification information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Accordingly, the SGW 35 may request the PGW 30 to establish a PDN connection between the UE 10 and the PGW 30, or may request the UE 10 to assign a GRIP address.
 PGW30は、SGW35からセッション確立要求を受信する。PGW30はセッション確立要求に含まれるAPNと、PDNタイプと、GRIPアドレスを要求することを示す識別情報を受信してもよい。 The PGW 30 receives a session establishment request from the SGW 35. The PGW 30 may receive identification information indicating that an APN, a PDN type, and a GRIP address are included in the session establishment request.
 PGW30は、セッション確立要求の受信に基づき、UE10にGRIPアドレスを割り当てる(S608)。 The PGW 30 assigns a GRIP address to the UE 10 based on the reception of the session establishment request (S608).
 なお、PGW30は、GRIPアドレスを要求することを示す情報に基づいてGRIPアドレスの割り当てを実施してもよい。具体的には、GRIPアドレスを要求することを示す情報を受信した場合には、PGW30はGRIPアドレスを割り当て、GRIPアドレスを要求することを示す情報を受信していない場合には、従来のIPアドレスを割り当てても良い。 Note that the PGW 30 may assign a GRIP address based on information indicating that a GRIP address is requested. Specifically, when the information indicating that the GRIP address is requested is received, the PGW 30 assigns the GRIP address, and when the information indicating that the GRIP address is requested is not received, the conventional IP address May be assigned.
 なお、GRIPアドレスを要求することを示す情報がAPNの場合、受信したAPNがGRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNである場合には、PGW30はUE10にGRIPアドレスを割り当て、他のアプリケーションや通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNを受信した場合には、PGW30は、従来IPアドレスを割り当てても良い。 When the information indicating that a GRIP address is requested is an APN, the received APN is an APN associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using the GRIP address. Alternatively, the PGW 30 may assign a GRIP address to the UE 10, and when receiving an APN associated with another application or communication service, the PGW 30 may assign a conventional IP address.
 PGW30は、セッション確立要求に対する応答メッセージとして、セッション確立応答メッセージをSGW35に送信する(S610)。PGW30はセッション確立応答メッセージに、APNと、PDNタイプと、UEに割り当てたIPアドレスを含めて送信してもよい。更に、セッション確立応答メッセージにIPアドレスの利用が有効期間を示すタイマーを含めてもよい。 The PGW 30 transmits a session establishment response message to the SGW 35 as a response message to the session establishment request (S610). The PGW 30 may transmit the session establishment response message including the APN, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE. Further, a timer indicating that the use of the IP address is valid may be included in the session establishment response message.
 SGW35はPGW30からセッション確立応答メッセージを受信し、UE10に割り当てたGRIPアドレスを取得する。次に、SGW35はMME40から受信したセッション確立要求に対する応答として、セッション確立応答メッセージをMME40に送信する(S612)。セッション確立応答メッセージには、APNとPDNタイプとIPアドレスを含む。MME40は、セッション確立応答に含まれるAPNと、PDNタイプと、UEに割り当てられたIPアドレスを受信してもよい。更に、セッション確立応答メッセージにIPアドレスの利用が有効期間を示すタイマーを含めてもよい。 The SGW 35 receives the session establishment response message from the PGW 30 and acquires the GRIP address assigned to the UE 10. Next, the SGW 35 transmits a session establishment response message to the MME 40 as a response to the session establishment request received from the MME 40 (S612). The session establishment response message includes the APN, PDN type, and IP address. The MME 40 may receive the APN included in the session establishment response, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE. Further, a timer indicating that the use of the IP address is valid may be included in the session establishment response message.
 次に、MME40は、UE10が送信するPDNコネクション要求の応答メッセージとして、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトをeNB45に送信する(S614)。PDNコネクティビティアクセプトは、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、UE10に割り当てられたIPアドレスと、とを含めて送信してもよい。ここで、MME40は、IPアドレスとして、GRIPアドレスを含めても送信してもよい。 Next, the MME 40 transmits a PDN connectivity accept to the eNB 45 as a response message of the PDN connection request transmitted by the UE 10 (S614). The PDN connectivity accept may be transmitted including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the IP address assigned to the UE 10. Here, the MME 40 may transmit the IP address including the GRIP address.
 更に、MME40は、メッセージにPDNコネクティビティアクセプトにGRIPアドレスの利用が有効期間を示すタイマーを含めてもよい。 Furthermore, the MME 40 may include a timer indicating that the use of the GRIP address is valid in the PDN connectivity accept in the message.
 eNB45は、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトを受信し、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトに含まれるUEの識別情報と、UE10に割り当てたGRIPアドレスと、接続するAPNを識別する情報とを受信してもよい。 The eNB 45 may receive the PDN connectivity accept and receive the UE identification information included in the PDN connectivity accept, the GRIP address assigned to the UE 10, and the information identifying the APN to be connected.
 eNB45は、この受信に基づき、UE10とeNB45間に確立する無線リソースを割り当ててもよい。 The eNB 45 may allocate radio resources established between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 based on this reception.
 さらに、eNB45は、RRC接続再設定メッセージを含める、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトをUE10に送信してもよい(S616)。PDNコネクティビティアクセプトには、UEの識別情報と、UEに割り当てたGRIPアドレスと、接続するAPNを識別する情報とを含めて送信してもよい。更には、リソースに関する情報やGRIPアドレスの有効期間を示すタイマーなどを含めて送信してもよい。 Furthermore, the eNB 45 may transmit a PDN connectivity accept including the RRC connection reconfiguration message to the UE 10 (S616). The PDN connectivity accept may include UE identification information, a GRIP address assigned to the UE, and information identifying the APN to be connected. Furthermore, information including resources and a timer indicating the validity period of the GRIP address may be transmitted.
 UE10は、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトとRRC接続再設定メッセージを受信する。UE10は、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトに含まれる、UEの識別情報と、UEに割り当てたGRIPアドレスと、接続するAPNを識別する情報と、PDNタイプと、を受信してもよい。UE10は、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づき、GRIPアドレスを取得する。 UE 10 receives the PDN connectivity accept and RRC connection reset message. The UE 10 may receive the UE identification information, the GRIP address assigned to the UE, the information identifying the APN to be connected, and the PDN type included in the PDN connectivity accept. The UE 10 acquires a GRIP address based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message.
 更に、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトとRRC再接続設定メッセージの受信により、UE10はAPNに対する接続性が確立されたことを検出してもよい。さらに、UE10は、APNに対応する通信を行うための通信路が確立されたことを検出してもよい。また、UE10は、APNに対応する、グローバリールータブルな通信に使用するGRIPアドレスを取得してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may detect that the connectivity to the APN has been established by receiving the PDN connectivity accept and the RRC reconnection setup message. Further, the UE 10 may detect that a communication path for performing communication corresponding to the APN has been established. Moreover, UE10 may acquire the GRIP address used for globally routable communication corresponding to APN.
 UE10はPDNコネクティビティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づき、PGWとの間にPDNコネクションを確立してよい。 The UE 10 may establish a PDN connection with the PGW based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message.
 次に、UE10は、RRC接続再設定完了メッセージをeNB45に送信する(S618)。さらに、直接転送メッセージをeNB45に送信する(S622)。 Next, the UE 10 transmits an RRC connection reconfiguration completion message to the eNB 45 (S618). Further, the direct transfer message is transmitted to the eNB 45 (S622).
 eNB45は、RRC接続再設定完了メッセージの受信にともない、初期コンテキスト設定応答メッセージをMME40に送信する(S620)。また、eNB45は、直接転送メッセージの受信に伴い、アタッチ完了メッセージをMME40に送信する(S640)。 The eNB 45 transmits an initial context setting response message to the MME 40 upon reception of the RRC connection reconfiguration completion message (S620). Moreover, eNB45 transmits an attachment completion message to MME40 with reception of a direct transfer message (S640).
 以上により、UE10はPGW30との間にPDNコネクションを確立することができる。UE10は、確立したPDNコネクションを用いて、アプリケーションサーバ20で管理されるアプリケーションの通信を行ってよい。 As described above, the UE 10 can establish a PDN connection with the PGW 30. The UE 10 may perform communication of an application managed by the application server 20 using the established PDN connection.
 次に、UE10はeNB45から受信したGRIPアドレスとアプリケーション識別情報を対応付ける(S626)。ここで、アプリケーション識別情報はGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションを識別する識別情報である。具体的なアプリケーション識別情報は、APNであってよい。さらに、ここで記憶するAPNは、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションや、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行う通信サービスに対応づけられたAPNであってよい。もしくは、アプリケーション識別情報はアプリケーションのフローを識別するTFTであってもよい。もしくは、アプリケーション識別情報としてAPNとTFTの両方を記憶しても良い。これにより、UE10は、アプリケーションの通信を実施する際、アプリケーション識別情報を基に対応するGRIPアドレスを選択し、選択したGRIPアドレスを用いてアプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションデータの送受信を行うことができる。 Next, the UE 10 associates the GRIP address received from the eNB 45 with the application identification information (S626). Here, the application identification information is identification information for identifying an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. The specific application identification information may be APN. Further, the APN stored here may be an APN associated with an application that performs communication using a GRIP address or a communication service that performs communication using a GRIP address. Alternatively, the application identification information may be a TFT that identifies an application flow. Alternatively, both APN and TFT may be stored as application identification information. Thereby, when performing communication of an application, the UE 10 selects a corresponding GRIP address based on the application identification information, and transmits / receives application data identified by the application identification information using the selected GRIP address. it can.
 以上により、UE10は、アプリケーション識別情報で識別されたアプリケーションの通信を、PGW30との間に確立したPDNコネクションを用いて行うことができる。 As described above, the UE 10 can perform communication of the application identified by the application identification information by using the PDN connection established with the PGW 30.
 [1.3.3.GRIPアドレスを用いた端末間通信例]
 次に、GRIPアドレスを用いた端末間通信のサービス例を示す。ここで、アプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションは、P2Pなどデバイス間の通信を実現するアプリケーションである。
[1.3.3. Example of communication between terminals using a GRIP address]
Next, a service example of communication between terminals using a GRIP address is shown. Here, the application identified by the application identification information is an application that realizes communication between devices such as P2P.
 図9に、GRIPアドレスを用いた端末間通信例を説明するためのシステムの全体図を示す。図9に示す通信システム2は、UE10aと、UE10bと、IP移動通信ネットワーク5とアプリケーションサーバ20で構成されている。 FIG. 9 shows an overall view of a system for explaining an example of communication between terminals using a GRIP address. The communication system 2 shown in FIG. 9 includes a UE 10a, a UE 10b, an IP mobile communication network 5, and an application server 20.
 図9では、UE10aとUE10bが契約する移動通信事業者が同じであるとして、同じIP移動通信ネットワーク5に接続するが、異なる移動通信事業者と契約していてもよいものとする。つまり、UE10aとUE10bは、互いに異なるIP移動通信ネットワークに接続していてもよい。その際、異なる通信事業者のIP移動通信ネットワーク同士は接続されていてもよい。より具体的には、それぞれのIPネットワークに構成されるPGW同士が接続されることにより、IP移動通信ネットワーク動詞を接続していてもよい。 In FIG. 9, it is assumed that the mobile communication carriers with which the UE 10a and the UE 10b make a contract are the same, but they are connected to the same IP mobile communication network 5, but they may have contracts with different mobile communication carriers. That is, the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be connected to different IP mobile communication networks. At that time, IP mobile communication networks of different communication carriers may be connected to each other. More specifically, IP mobile communication network verbs may be connected by connecting PGWs configured in respective IP networks.
 なお、GRIPアドレスは、ある移動通信事業者が運用するIP移動通信ネットワークから、他の移動通信事業者の運用するIP移動通信ネットワークへパケットを配送することを許可したIPアドレスであってよい。言い換えると、PGWは、UE10aから受信したパケットの送信元アドレスがGRIPアドレスであることにより、異なる移動通信事業者の運用するIP移動通信ネットワークに構成するPGWへパケットを送信し、UE10aから受信したパケットの送信元アドレスが従来IPアドレスなどであり、GRIPアドレスでは無い場合には、パケットの送信は行わず、パケットを破棄するなどの処理を実行してもよい。 Note that the GRIP address may be an IP address permitted to deliver a packet from an IP mobile communication network operated by a certain mobile communication carrier to an IP mobile communication network operated by another mobile communication carrier. In other words, when the source address of the packet received from the UE 10a is a GRIP address, the PGW transmits the packet to the PGW configured in the IP mobile communication network operated by a different mobile communication carrier, and receives the packet received from the UE 10a. If the source address is a conventional IP address and not a GRIP address, the packet may not be transmitted and a process such as discarding the packet may be executed.
 このように、GRIPアドレスは、異なる移動通信事業者網間の配送を行うアドレスであってもよい。 As described above, the GRIP address may be an address for delivery between different mobile communication carrier networks.
 もしくは、UE10aとUE10bは単一の通信事業者によって運用されるIP移動通信ネットワークであってもよい。なお、GRIPアドレスは、IP移動通信ネットワークの内部で端末間の送受信するパケットを配送することを許可したIPアドレスであってよい。言い換えると、PGWは、UE10aから受信したパケットの送信元アドレスがGRIPアドレスであることにより、パケットをPDNへ配送するのでなく、通信相手の端末へ向けて配送してもよい。もしくは、IP移動通信ネットワークに複数のPGWが含まれて構成されている場合には、PGWは、UE10aから受信したパケットの送信元アドレスがGRIPアドレスであることにより、パケットをUE10bがPDNコネクションを確立するPGWへ向けて配送してもよい。なお、UE10aから受信したパケットの送信元アドレスが従来IPアドレスなどであり、GRIPアドレスでは無い場合には、パケットの送信は行わず、パケットを破棄するなどの処理を実行してもよい。 Alternatively, the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be an IP mobile communication network operated by a single communication carrier. Note that the GRIP address may be an IP address that permits delivery of a packet to be transmitted / received between terminals within the IP mobile communication network. In other words, since the source address of the packet received from the UE 10a is a GRIP address, the PGW may deliver the packet not to the PDN but to the communication partner terminal. Alternatively, when the IP mobile communication network is configured to include a plurality of PGWs, the PGW establishes a PDN connection when the packet is received from the UE 10a because the source address of the packet is a GRIP address. May be delivered to the PGW. If the source address of the packet received from the UE 10a is a conventional IP address or the like and is not a GRIP address, processing such as discarding the packet may be performed without transmitting the packet.
 UE10aとUE10bの構成は図3に示す構成と同様でもよく、アプリケーションサーバ20の構成は図4に示す構成と同様であるとする。なお、複数の移動通信事業者によりそれぞれIP移動通信ネットワークが構成され、さらに、IP移動通信ネットワークが相互接続されている場合には、アプリケーションサーバは、単一の装置で構成され、すべてのIP移動通信ネットワークに接続されていてもよいし、IP移動通信ネットワーク毎に複数構成されてもよい。また、UE10aとUE10bは、同様のアプリケーションIDを持っているものとする。 The configuration of the UE 10a and the UE 10b may be the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 3, and the configuration of the application server 20 is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. In addition, when an IP mobile communication network is configured by a plurality of mobile communication carriers, and when the IP mobile communication networks are interconnected, the application server is configured by a single device, and all IP mobile networks It may be connected to a communication network, or a plurality of IP mobile communication networks may be configured. Further, it is assumed that the UE 10a and the UE 10b have the same application ID.
 まず、UE10aとUE10bは、それぞれアプリケーションサーバ20からのアプリケーションの利用の認証処理をする。アプリケーションの利用の認証処理は、図7に示す処理でもよい。 First, each of the UE 10a and the UE 10b performs an authentication process for using an application from the application server 20. The application usage authentication process may be the process shown in FIG.
 UE10aはPDNコネクティビティ手続きの際に、PGW30からGRIPアドレスを図8に示す処理で取得する。 The UE 10a acquires the GRIP address from the PGW 30 in the process shown in FIG. 8 during the PDN connectivity procedure.
 UE10aは、取得したGRIPアドレスを通知するための制御メッセージをアプリケーションサーバ20に送信する。UE10aは、制御メッセージに少なくともGRIPアドレスとアプリケーションIDとを含めて送信してもよい。更にUEの識別情報や、GRIPアドレスの有効期間を示すタイマーを含めてもよい。 The UE 10a transmits a control message for notifying the acquired GRIP address to the application server 20. The UE 10a may transmit the control message including at least the GRIP address and the application ID. Further, a timer indicating the identification information of the UE and the validity period of the GRIP address may be included.
 アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10aからGRIPアドレスの通知するための制御メッセージを受信する。アプリケーションサーバ20は、GRIPアドレス通知信号に含まれるUE10aのGRIPアドレスを取得し、記憶部240のGRIPアドレス情報246に、記憶する。この時、GRIPアドレスの有効期間を示すタイマーを対応づけて記憶してもよい。この場合、タイマーのカウントを開始し、タイマーが消費されるまでの時間、GRIPアドレスを記憶しておき、タイマーが消費されたことをトリガーとして、GRIPアドレスを記憶部240から削除してもよい。 Application server 20 receives a control message for notifying the GRIP address from UE 10a. The application server 20 acquires the GRIP address of the UE 10a included in the GRIP address notification signal and stores it in the GRIP address information 246 of the storage unit 240. At this time, a timer indicating the validity period of the GRIP address may be stored in association with it. In this case, the timer count may be started, the time until the timer is consumed, the GRIP address may be stored, and the GRIP address may be deleted from the storage unit 240 when triggered by the timer being consumed.
 これにより、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10aとGRIPアドレスとを対応づけて記憶し、UE10aがGRIPアドレスを取得していることを管理してもよい。 Thereby, the application server 20 may store the UE 10a and the GRIP address in association with each other and manage that the UE 10a acquires the GRIP address.
 次に、UE10bはアプリケーションサーバ20に記憶されるUE10aのGRIPアドレスを検出し、アプリケーションサーバ20に、UE10bが、UE10aのGRIPアドレスを用いてUE10aとP2P通信する事に対する許可を要求する。 Next, the UE 10b detects the GRIP address of the UE 10a stored in the application server 20, and requests the application server 20 for permission for the UE 10b to perform P2P communication with the UE 10a using the GRIP address of the UE 10a.
 この時、アプリケーションサーバ20はアプリケーションサーバ20が、UE10bに対してGRIPアドレスを用いたP2P通信の許可を決定してもよい。または、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10bからの要求に基づき、UE10aに、UE10bとGRIPアドレスを用いたP2P通信の許可を要求してもよい。この時、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10aから、UE10bのGRIPアドレスを用いたP2P通信の許可情報を受信してもよい。 At this time, the application server 20 may determine permission of P2P communication using the GRIP address for the UE 10b. Or the application server 20 may request | require permission of P2P communication using UE10b and a GRIP address from UE10a based on the request | requirement from UE10b. At this time, the application server 20 may receive permission information for P2P communication using the GRIP address of the UE 10b from the UE 10a.
 アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10bに、GRIPアドレスの許可情報を送信する。 Application server 20 transmits permission information of the GRIP address to UE 10b.
 UE10bはアプリケーションサーバ20からUE10aにGRIPアドレスの利用の許可情報を受信し、許可された場合、GRIPアドレスを用いてUE10aとP2P通信を開始する。 The UE 10b receives permission information on the use of the GRIP address from the application server 20 to the UE 10a, and when permitted, starts the P2P communication with the UE 10a using the GRIP address.
 なお、UE10bがアプリケーションサーバ20から、GRIPアドレスとともにタイマーを取得した場合、UE10bは、タイマーのカウントを開始し、タイマーが消費されたら、UE10aとGRIPアドレスを用いたIP接続による通信を停止してもよい。 When the UE 10b acquires a timer together with the GRIP address from the application server 20, the UE 10b starts counting the timer. When the timer is consumed, the UE 10b may stop communication with the UE 10a through the IP connection using the GRIP address. Good.
 または、PGW30がUE10aに、GRIPアドレスの利用の停止予定を通知するメッセージを送信してもよい。この場合、UE10aは、受信した通知メッセージをもとに、GRIPアドレスの使用を停止し、アプリケーションサーバ20にGRIPアドレスが使用できなくなることを通知してもよい。更に、UE10aは、通信相手であるUE10bにも、GRIPアドレスの使用を停止することを通知してもよい。または、アプリケーションサーバ20がUE10bにGRIPアドレスの使用を停止することを通知してもよい。 Alternatively, the PGW 30 may transmit a message notifying the UE 10a of a schedule to stop using the GRIP address. In this case, the UE 10a may stop using the GRIP address based on the received notification message and notify the application server 20 that the GRIP address cannot be used. Furthermore, the UE 10a may notify the UE 10b that is the communication partner that the use of the GRIP address is stopped. Alternatively, the application server 20 may notify the UE 10b that the use of the GRIP address is stopped.
 このように、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10aがGRIPアドレスを取得していることを検出してもよい。さらに、アプリケーションサーバ20は、UE10aがGRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うことができる期間を管理してもよい。 Thus, the application server 20 may detect that the UE 10a has acquired the GRIP address. Furthermore, the application server 20 may manage a period during which the UE 10a can perform communication using the GRIP address.
 [1.3.4.トラッキングエリア更新手続き]
 次に、UE10が移動することに伴う、トラッキングエリア更新手続きについて説明する。以下では、GRIPアドレスを用いたアプリケーションの利用が許可されたUEが、移動に伴うトラッキングエリア更新手続きにより、UE10の位置情報を管理するMMEを変更する場合、UE10のGRIPアドレスの利用に関する許可情報をMME間で転送することで、UEのGRIPアドレスの利用に関する許可の状態を維持する方法について説明する。
[1.3.4. Tracking area update procedure]
Next, a tracking area update procedure accompanying the movement of the UE 10 will be described. In the following, when a UE that is permitted to use an application using a GRIP address changes an MME that manages location information of the UE 10 by a tracking area update procedure accompanying movement, permission information regarding the use of the GRIP address of the UE 10 is displayed. A method for maintaining the permission state regarding the use of the GRIP address of the UE by transferring between the MMEs will be described.
 コアネットワーク7には、MME40とは別に、複数の位置管理装置を構成してもよい。例えば、コアネットワーク7には、MME40とMME-A90とを構成してもよい。MME-A90は、MME40との違いが管理するトラッキングエリアが異なるのみであり、その他の構成はMME40と同一である。そのため、MME-A90の構成を改めて説明することは省略する。 In the core network 7, a plurality of location management devices may be configured separately from the MME 40. For example, the MME 40 and the MME-A 90 may be configured in the core network 7. The MME-A 90 is different from the MME 40 only in the management of the tracking area, and the other configuration is the same as the MME 40. Therefore, the description of the configuration of the MME-A 90 is omitted.
 ここで、MME40では、eNB45を含む複数の基地局装置群と接続性を確立し、トラッキングエリアと呼ばれるエリアを構成している。例えば、MME40は、物理的な位置の近いエリア内に構成する基地局群を管理し、こうしたエリアをトラッキングエリアとして構成することができる。また、トラッキングエリアに対応付けられる基地局群は、物理的に位置が近いかどうかにかかわらず、通信事業者が運用において区別して管理したい基地局を選択して構成するなどして構成することもできる。つまり、MME40がトラッキングエリアに対応付けて複数の基地局を管理し、トラッキングエリアを構成することができる。 Here, the MME 40 establishes connectivity with a plurality of base station apparatuses including the eNB 45, and configures an area called a tracking area. For example, the MME 40 can manage a group of base stations configured in an area close to a physical position, and configure such an area as a tracking area. In addition, the base station group associated with the tracking area may be configured by selecting and configuring a base station that the communication carrier wants to manage and distinguish in operation regardless of whether the location is physically close or not. it can. That is, the MME 40 can manage a plurality of base stations in association with the tracking area and configure the tracking area.
 アイドルモードの状態にあるUE10がトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行する場合、UE10の移動によってトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行する前後で異なる基地局に対して接続を行う場合がある。さらに、それぞれの基地局を管理する位置管理装置が異なる場合がある。例えば、UE10は、MME40が管理する基地局装置から、MME-A90が管理する基地局装置の近隣に移動してトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行することがある。 When the UE 10 in the idle mode executes the tracking area update procedure, the UE 10 may connect to different base stations before and after executing the tracking area update procedure due to movement of the UE 10. Furthermore, the location management device that manages each base station may be different. For example, the UE 10 may move from the base station device managed by the MME 40 to the vicinity of the base station device managed by the MME-A 90 and execute the tracking area update procedure.
 以下では、上記のように異なる位置管理装置のトラッキングエリアへ移動するトラッキングエリア更新手続きを説明する。トラッキングエリアの更新手続きは、MME-A90が、UE10がMME40の管理する基地局からからMME-A90の管理する基地局へ移動したことを検出する手続きである。また、UE10にとっては、MME40の管理するトラッキングエリアからMME-A90の管理するトラッキングエリアへ移動手続きであり、トラッキングエリア更新手続きでは、位置管理装置の再配置(MME-Relocation)を実行する。 In the following, the tracking area update procedure for moving to a tracking area of a different location management device as described above will be described. The tracking area update procedure is a procedure in which the MME-A 90 detects that the UE 10 has moved from the base station managed by the MME 40 to the base station managed by the MME-A 90. For the UE 10, it is a procedure for moving from the tracking area managed by the MME 40 to the tracking area managed by the MME-A 90. In the tracking area update procedure, relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device is executed.
 図10を用いて、位置管理装置の再配置を含むトラッキングエリア更新手続きを説明する。まず、UE10が主導して実行するトラッキングエリア更新手続きの初期状態の説明をする。 Referring to FIG. 10, the tracking area update procedure including relocation of the position management device will be described. First, an initial state of the tracking area update procedure that is led and executed by the UE 10 will be described.
 UE10は、前述した手続きにより、eNB45を介してコアネットワーク7に接続し、PGW30との間にPDNコネクションを確立している。さらに、アプリケーションサーバ20に登録し、GRIPアドレスを取得し、他のUEとGRIPアドレスを用いて、IP接続を確立している。UE10はこうした通信路を用いて送受信を行う。 The UE 10 is connected to the core network 7 via the eNB 45 and establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30 according to the procedure described above. Furthermore, it registers with the application server 20, acquires a GRIP address, and establishes IP connection using GRIP address with other UE. UE10 performs transmission / reception using such a communication path.
 さらにUE10は、PDNコネクションおよび、GRIPアドレスを用いたIP接続を用いたデータ送受信が一定時間以上なく、UE10とeNB45との間の無線ベアラが解放され、アイドルモードに遷移する。 Furthermore, the UE 10 does not perform data transmission / reception using the PDN connection and the IP connection using the GRIP address for a predetermined time or more, the radio bearer between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 is released, and transitions to the idle mode.
 ここで、トラッキングエリアの更新手続きを実施する際の初期状態は、これに限らずUE10がトラッキングエリアを更新する従来の状態を含む任意の状態であってよい。また、UE10はアイドルモードの状態であるか否かにかぎらず、アクティブモードにおいてトラッキング更新手続きを実行してもよい。 Here, the initial state when performing the tracking area update procedure is not limited to this, and may be any state including a conventional state in which the UE 10 updates the tracking area. Further, the UE 10 may execute the tracking update procedure in the active mode regardless of whether or not the UE 10 is in the idle mode.
 また、UE10は、移動に伴い、eNB45とは異なる基地局装置であるeNB-A95にトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信してもよい。以下、トラッキング更新手続きの手順を説明する。 Also, the UE 10 may transmit a tracking area update request message to the eNB-A 95, which is a base station device different from the eNB 45, with movement. Hereinafter, the tracking update procedure will be described.
 UE10はトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージをeNB-A95に送信する(S1002)。メッセージには、UE10の識別情報、トラッキングエリアを識別する情報、位置管理装置の識別情報、アプリケーション識別情報、アプリケーションユーザ識別情報、アプリケーションの許可情報を含んで送信してもよい。また、UE10がProSe使用可能なUEである場合、UE10の識別情報としてProSe IDを用いてよい。さらに、ProSe能力情報を含めてもよい。ProSe能力情報としては、近隣のUEとの間の直接通信路を確立することができることを示すProSeサービスを享受できることを示す能力情報であってよい。または、ProSeサービスを享受し、近隣端末との間で直接通信路を確立していることを示す情報であってもよいまた、これらの情報を異なる識別情報としてそれぞれ異なる識別情報としてメッセージに含めてもよい。 UE10 transmits a tracking area update request message to eNB-A95 (S1002). The message may include the identification information of the UE 10, the information for identifying the tracking area, the identification information of the location management device, the application identification information, the application user identification information, and the application permission information. Further, when the UE 10 is a UE that can use ProSe, the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10. Further, ProSe capability information may be included. The ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal. In addition, these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
 また、位置管理装置を識別する情報は、これまでUE10の位置管理を実行していたMME40を識別する情報を含めてもよい。メッセージに含める情報には、これらに限らず従来のトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージに含まれる情報と併せて含めてもよい。 Further, the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far. The information included in the message is not limited to this, and may be included together with the information included in the conventional tracking area update request message.
 アプリケーション識別情報は、UE10が他のUEとの間に通信路を確立する際に使用するアプリケーションを識別する識別情報である。 Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used when the UE 10 establishes a communication path with another UE.
 アプリケーションユーザ識別情報は、アプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションにおいてユーザもしくはUE10を識別する識別情報であってよい。 The application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
 さらに、UEを識別する情報は、IMSIなどの加入者識別情報であってもよいし、TEIDなどの一時的に割り当てられた識別情報であってもよいし、アプリケーションユーザ識別情報などであってもよい。 Furthermore, the information for identifying the UE may be subscriber identification information such as IMSI, may be temporarily assigned identification information such as TEID, or may be application user identification information. Good.
 アプリケーションの許可情報は、UE10がアプリケーション識別情報で示されるアプリケーションを用いた通信をアプリケーションサーバ20に許可されているかを示す識別情報であり、アプリケーション識別情報を用いてもよい。 The application permission information is identification information indicating whether or not the application server 20 is permitted to communicate using the application indicated by the application identification information, and the application identification information may be used.
 UE10がトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信するトリガーは、アイドルモードの状態にあるUE10が、アイドルモードに遷移したタイミングから実行するタイマーに基づいて、送信タイミングを決定してもよい。また、トラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信する間隔を決定するタイマーは、UE10が予め保持しておき、タイマーの値を決定してもよい。 The trigger for the UE 10 to transmit the tracking area update request message may determine the transmission timing based on a timer that is executed from the timing when the UE 10 in the idle mode transitions to the idle mode. In addition, the timer that determines the interval at which the tracking area update request message is transmitted may be held in advance by the UE 10 and the timer value may be determined.
 eNB-A95は、トラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを受信する。eNB-A95はMME-A90と接続性のある基地局装置であり、MME-A90によって管理されるトラッキングエリアに属する基地局装置であってよい。言い換えると、eNB-A95はMME-A90が管理する基地局装置であり、MME-A90が構成するトラッキングエリアに属する基地局装置である。ここで、eNB-A95は、LTE AN80に構成されるeNB45とは異なる基地局装置であってよい。また、eNB-A95の属するトラッキングエリアとeNB45の属するトラッキングエリアは異なるトラッキングエリアであってよい。さらに、それぞれのトラッキングエリアはMME40によって管理されるトラッキングエリアであってもよいし、eNB-A95の属するトラッキングエリアはMME-A90によって管理され、eNB45の属するトラッキングエリアはMME40によって管理されるなど、異なる位置管理装置によって管理されてもよい。また、eNB-A95の構成は既に説明したeNB45の構成と同様であって良いためここでの詳細説明は省略する。 ENB-A95 receives the tracking area update request message. The eNB-A 95 is a base station device that has connectivity with the MME-A 90, and may be a base station device that belongs to a tracking area managed by the MME-A 90. In other words, the eNB-A 95 is a base station device managed by the MME-A 90, and is a base station device belonging to the tracking area configured by the MME-A 90. Here, the eNB-A 95 may be a base station device different from the eNB 45 configured in the LTE AN80. Also, the tracking area to which the eNB-A 95 belongs and the tracking area to which the eNB 45 belongs may be different tracking areas. Further, each tracking area may be a tracking area managed by the MME 40, a tracking area to which the eNB-A 95 belongs is managed by the MME-A 90, a tracking area to which the eNB 45 belongs is managed by the MME 40, and so on. It may be managed by the position management device. Further, the configuration of the eNB-A 95 may be the same as the configuration of the eNB 45 already described, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.
 ここで、UE10は定期的にトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行しており、前回実行したトラッキング更新手続きでは、UE10はeNB45に対してトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信してトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行していてもよい。 Here, the UE 10 periodically executes the tracking area update procedure. In the previously executed tracking update procedure, the UE 10 transmits the tracking area update request message to the eNB 45 and executes the tracking area update procedure. Also good.
 eNB45はMME40と接続性のある基地局装置であり、MME40によって管理されるトラッキングエリアに属する基地局装置であってよい。言い換えると、eNB45はMME40が管理する基地局装置であり、MME40が構成するトラッキングエリアに属する基地局装置である。 The eNB 45 is a base station device having connectivity with the MME 40, and may be a base station device belonging to a tracking area managed by the MME 40. In other words, the eNB 45 is a base station device managed by the MME 40, and is a base station device belonging to the tracking area formed by the MME 40.
 つまり、UE10は本トラッキングエリア更新によって、以前にトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信した基地局とは異なる基地局装置に対してトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを送信する。さらに、トラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを受信した基地局は、以前の基地局とは異なる位置管理装置によって管理された基地局である。 That is, the UE 10 transmits a tracking area update request message to a base station apparatus different from the base station that previously transmitted the tracking area update request message by this tracking area update. Furthermore, the base station that has received the tracking area update request message is a base station that is managed by a location management device that is different from the previous base station.
 eNB-A95は、UE10からのトラッキングエリア更新要求の受信に基づいて、MME-A90にトラッキングエリア更新要求を送信してもよい(S1004)。メッセージには、UE10の識別情報、トラッキングエリアを識別する情報、位置管理装置の識別情報、eNB-A95を識別する基地局識別情報、アプリケーション識別情報、アプリケーションユーザ識別情報、を含んで送信してもよい。 The eNB-A 95 may transmit the tracking area update request to the MME-A 90 based on the reception of the tracking area update request from the UE 10 (S1004). The message may also include UE 10 identification information, tracking area identification information, location management apparatus identification information, base station identification information identifying eNB-A 95, application identification information, and application user identification information. Good.
 また、UE10がProSe使用可能なUEである場合、UE10の識別情報としてProSe IDを用いてよい。さらに、メッセージにProSe能力情報を含めてもよい。 Further, when the UE 10 is a UE that can use ProSe, the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10. Further, ProSe capability information may be included in the message.
 ProSe能力情報としては、近隣のUEとの間の直接通信路を確立することができることを示すProSeサービスを享受できることを示す能力情報であってよい。または、ProSeサービスを享受し、近隣端末との間で直接通信路を確立していることを示す情報であってもよいまた、これらの情報を異なる識別情報としてそれぞれ異なる識別情報としてメッセージに含めてもよい。 The ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal. In addition, these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
 また、位置管理装置を識別する情報は、これまでUE10の位置管理を実行していたMME40を識別する情報を含めてもよい。メッセージに含める情報には、これらに限らず従来のトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージに含まれる情報と併せて含めてもよい。 Further, the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far. The information included in the message is not limited to this, and may be included together with the information included in the conventional tracking area update request message.
 アプリケーション識別情報は、UE10が他のUEとの間に通信路を確立するサービスにおいて使用するアプリケーションを識別する識別情報である。 Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used in a service in which the UE 10 establishes a communication path with another UE.
 アプリケーションユーザ識別情報は、アプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションにおいてユーザもしくはUE10を識別する識別情報であってよい。 The application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
 ProSeコードは、近隣に位置する他のUEに対して自身が近隣に位置することをアナウンスする際に送信する情報であってよい。さらに、近隣に位置する他のUEが近隣に位置することをモニタリングする際に受信する情報であってよい。ProSeコードは、アプリケーション識別情報や、UEを識別する情報や、PLMNなどのオペレータネットワークを識別する識別情報を組み合わせて構成してもよい。さらに、UEを識別する情報は、IMSIなどの加入者識別情報であってもよいし、TEIDなどの一時的に割り当てられた識別情報であってもよいし、アプリケーションユーザ識別情報などであってもよい。 The ProSe code may be information transmitted when announcing that the UE is located in the vicinity to other UEs located in the vicinity. Further, it may be information received when monitoring that another UE located in the vicinity is located in the vicinity. The ProSe code may be configured by combining application identification information, information for identifying a UE, and identification information for identifying an operator network such as a PLMN. Furthermore, the information for identifying the UE may be subscriber identification information such as IMSI, may be temporarily assigned identification information such as TEID, or may be application user identification information. Good.
 MME-A90は、eNB-A95から送信されるトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、コンテキスト要求メッセージをMME40に送信してもよい(S1006)。MME-A90は、こうしたコンテキスト供給メッセージの送信により、位置管理装置の再配置(MME-Relocation)を主導して実行してもよい。 The MME-A 90 may transmit a context request message to the MME 40 based on the reception of the tracking area update request message transmitted from the eNB-A 95 (S1006). The MME-A 90 may lead and execute the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device by transmitting the context supply message.
 MME-A90は、受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいてコンテキスト要求メッセージを送信する位置管理装置を選択してもよい。例えば、トラッキングエリア情報と位置管理装置とを関連づけて予め管理しておき、受信したトラッキングエリア情報に対応付けられる位置管理装置を選択し、MME40にメッセージを送信することを決定してもよい。また、eNB-A95から受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージに含まれる位置管理装置を識別する情報から、位置管理装置を選択し、MME40にコンテキスト要求メッセージを送信してもよい。 The MME-A 90 may select a location management device that transmits a context request message based on information included in the received tracking area update request message. For example, the tracking area information and the position management device may be associated and managed in advance, the position management device associated with the received tracking area information may be selected, and the message may be determined to be transmitted to the MME 40. Further, the location management device may be selected from the information for identifying the location management device included in the tracking area update request message received from the eNB-A 95, and the context request message may be transmitted to the MME 40.
 コンテキスト要求メッセージには、UE10の識別情報、トラッキングエリアを識別する情報、位置管理装置の識別情報、eNB-A95を識別する基地局識別情報、アプリケーション識別情報、アプリケーションユーザ識別情報、を含んで送信してもよい。 The context request message includes UE 10 identification information, tracking area identification information, location management apparatus identification information, eNB-A 95 identification base station identification information, application identification information, and application user identification information. May be.
 また、UE10がProSe使用可能なUEである場合、UE10の識別情報としてProSe IDを用いてよい。さらに、メッセージにProSe能力情報を含めてもよい。ProSe能力情報としては、近隣のUEとの間の直接通信路を確立することができることを示すProSeサービスを享受できることを示す能力情報であってよい。または、ProSeサービスを享受し、近隣端末との間で直接通信路を確立していることを示す情報であってもよいまた、これらの情報を異なる識別情報としてそれぞれ異なる識別情報としてメッセージに含めてもよい。 Further, when the UE 10 is a UE that can use ProSe, the ProSe ID may be used as the identification information of the UE 10. Further, ProSe capability information may be included in the message. The ProSe capability information may be capability information indicating that a ProSe service indicating that a direct communication path with a neighboring UE can be established can be enjoyed. Alternatively, it may be information indicating that a ProSe service is enjoyed and a direct communication path is established with a neighboring terminal. In addition, these pieces of information are included as different identification information in the message as different identification information. Also good.
 また、位置管理装置を識別する情報は、これまでUE10の位置管理を実行していたMME40を識別する情報を含めてもよい。さらに、MME-A90を識別する情報を含めてもよい。メッセージに含める情報には、これらに限らず従来のコンテキスト要求メッセージに含まれる情報と併せて含めてもよい。 Further, the information for identifying the location management device may include information for identifying the MME 40 that has been executing location management of the UE 10 so far. Furthermore, information for identifying the MME-A 90 may be included. The information included in the message is not limited to these, and may be included together with information included in the conventional context request message.
 アプリケーション識別情報は、UE10が他のUEとの間に通信路を確立するために使用するアプリケーションを識別する識別情報である。 Application identification information is identification information for identifying an application used by the UE 10 to establish a communication path with another UE.
 アプリケーションユーザ識別情報は、アプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションにおいてユーザもしくはUE10を識別する識別情報であってよい。 The application user identification information may be identification information for identifying the user or the UE 10 in the application identified by the application identification information.
 さらに、メッセージには、UE10が登録するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグを含めてもよい。 Further, the message may include a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20 registered by the UE 10.
 MME40は、コンテキスト要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、コンテキスト応答メッセージをMME-A90に送信してもよい(S1008)。 The MME 40 may transmit a context response message to the MME-A 90 based on the reception of the context request message (S1008).
 MME40は、UE10に関連付けて管理する許可情報342を管理し、メッセージには、許可情報342を含めて送信してもよい。 The MME 40 may manage the permission information 342 managed in association with the UE 10, and may transmit the message including the permission information 342.
 ここで、MME40は、コンテキスト要求メッセージに含まれるUE10の識別情報に基づいて、UE10に対応付けて管理する許可情報342を選択して含めてもよい。これにより、MME40はMME-A90に、UE10がGRIPアドレスの利用したサービスの利用を許可されていることを示す許可情報と、UE10のGRIPアドレスと、UE10に関する情報を通知してもよい。このように、MME40はMME-A90にUE10はGRIPの利用が許可されていることや、UE10はGRIPを現在取得していることを通知してもよい。 Here, the MME 40 may select and include the permission information 342 managed in association with the UE 10 based on the identification information of the UE 10 included in the context request message. Accordingly, the MME 40 may notify the MME-A 90 of permission information indicating that the UE 10 is permitted to use the service using the GRIP address, the GRIP address of the UE 10, and information related to the UE 10. As described above, the MME 40 may notify the MME-A 90 that the UE 10 is permitted to use the GRIP and that the UE 10 is currently acquiring the GRIP.
 また、MME40は、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めてコンテキスト応答を送信してもよい。 Further, the MME 40 may transmit a context response including the identification information of the application server 20.
 さらに、アプリケーションサーバ20を識別する情報をコンテキスト応答メッセージに含めるか否かは、コンテキスト要求メッセージに含まれるアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグの有無によって決定してもよい。 Further, whether or not to include information for identifying the application server 20 in the context response message may be determined depending on the presence or absence of a flag for requesting the identification information of the application server 20 included in the context request message.
 例えば、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグが含まれるコンテキスト要求メッセージを受信した場合には、MME-A90が保持するUE10に対応付けて管理するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めてメッセージを送信する。 For example, when a context request message including a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20 is received, a message including the identification information of the application server 20 managed in association with the UE 10 held by the MME-A 90 is transmitted. To do.
 また、コンテキスト要求メッセージにアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグが含まれていない場合には、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含まずにメッセージを送信する。 Also, if the context request message does not include the flag for requesting the identification information of the application server 20, the message is transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
 また、UE10に対してアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を管理していない場合いは、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含まずにコンテキスト応答を送信してもよい。 If the identification information of the application server 20 is not managed for the UE 10, the context response may be transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
 さらに、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別する情報を含めるか否かは、コンテキスト要求メッセージに含まれるアプリケーション識別情報もしくはアプリケーションユーザ識別情報の有無によって決定してもよい。 Further, whether or not to include information for identifying the application server 20 may be determined depending on the presence or absence of application identification information or application user identification information included in the context request message.
 例えば、アプリケーション識別情報もしくはアプリケーションユーザ識別情報が含まれるコンテキスト要求メッセージを受信した場合には、MME-A90が保持するUE10に対応付けて管理するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めてメッセージを送信する。 For example, when a context request message including application identification information or application user identification information is received, the message including the identification information of the application server 20 managed in association with the UE 10 held by the MME-A 90 is transmitted.
 また、コンテキスト要求メッセージにアプリケーション識別情報もしくはアプリケーションユーザ識別情報もしくはProSeコードが含まれていない場合には、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めてメッセージを含まずにメッセージを送信する。 Also, if the context request message does not include application identification information, application user identification information, or ProSe code, the message is transmitted without including the message including the identification information of the application server 20.
 また、UE10に対してアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を管理していない場合いは、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含まずにコンテキスト応答を送信してもよい。 If the identification information of the application server 20 is not managed for the UE 10, the context response may be transmitted without including the identification information of the application server 20.
 MME40は、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグや、ProSeサービスを享受できることを示す能力情報もしくは近隣端末との間で直接通信路を確立していることを示す情報のいずれかに基づいてアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めて送信してもよいし、これらの情報が複数含まれているなど、これらの情報の組み合わせて含めることを決定し、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。 The MME 40 uses the application server 20 based on either a flag requesting identification information of the application server 20, capability information indicating that the ProSe service can be enjoyed, or information indicating that a direct communication path has been established with a neighboring terminal. It may be transmitted including the identification information of the server 20, or it may be determined to include a combination of these information, such as including a plurality of such information, and transmitted including the identification information of the application server 20. Also good.
 MME-A90は、MME40からコンテキスト応答を受信する。MME-A90は、コンテキスト応答にアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報が含まれている場合には、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を許可情報342に記憶する。また、記憶するデータベースは、許可情報342に限らず、MMコンテキストなどのデータベースであってもよい。また、アプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報は、UE10の識別情報と対応づけて記憶しても良い。 The MME-A 90 receives a context response from the MME 40. When the identification information of the application server 20 is included in the context response, the MME-A 90 stores the identification information of the application server 20 in the permission information 342. Further, the database to be stored is not limited to the permission information 342 but may be a database such as an MM context. Further, the identification information of the application server 20 may be stored in association with the identification information of the UE 10.
 MME-A90は、コンテキスト応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、UEのコンテキストを記憶する。 The MME-A 90 stores the context of the UE based on the reception of the context response message.
 ここで、MME-A90は、GRIPアドレスの利用可否の判定処理をおこなってもよい。以下、判定処理を説明する。 Here, the MME-A 90 may perform processing for determining whether or not the GRIP address can be used. Hereinafter, the determination process will be described.
 また、MME-A90はメッセージから、UEのGRIPアドレスの使用の許可情報と、UE10のGRIPアドレスを取得し、記憶部に記憶してもよい。また、MME-A90が、GRIPアドレスの使用に関して、オペレータポリシーなどのポリシーを記憶している場合、ポリシーに基づき、UEのGRIPアドレスの使用の許可情報を記憶してもよい。 Further, the MME-A 90 may acquire permission information for using the GRIP address of the UE and the GRIP address of the UE 10 from the message, and store them in the storage unit. In addition, when the MME-A 90 stores a policy such as an operator policy regarding use of the GRIP address, permission information for use of the GRIP address of the UE may be stored based on the policy.
 具体的には、MME-A90が記憶するオペレータポリシーが、MME-A90のサービスエリアにあるUEが、GRIPアドレスを用いたアプリケーションを利用することを禁止している場合、MME-A90がMME40からUEのGRIPアドレスの使用の許可情報を取得しても、オペレータポリシーに従い、UEのGRIPアドレスの使用の許可情報を記憶しなくてもよい。 Specifically, when the operator policy stored in the MME-A 90 prohibits the UE in the service area of the MME-A 90 from using an application using the GRIP address, the MME-A 90 moves from the MME 40 to the UE. Even if the permission information on the use of the GRIP address of the UE is acquired, the permission information on the use of the GRIP address of the UE may not be stored according to the operator policy.
 このように、MME-A90は、トラッキングエリア更新手続きに伴い、MMEが接続する基地局に接続する端末装置に対して、GRIPの利用を許可したり、不許可としたりすることができる。なお、端末装置に対してGRIPの利用を許さない場合、MME-A90は受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求に対して応答メッセージをUE10に送信してもよい。なお、MME-A90は、応答メッセージの送信によりトラッキングエリアの更新が失敗したことや、GRIPの利用を許可しないことを通知してもよい。ここで、MME-A90は、トラッキングエリア更新アクセプトメッセージを応答メッセージとして送信し、メッセージにこれらの通知情報を示す情報を含めて送信してもよい。 As described above, the MME-A 90 can permit or deny the use of GRIP to the terminal device connected to the base station to which the MME is connected in accordance with the tracking area update procedure. When the terminal device is not permitted to use GRIP, the MME-A 90 may transmit a response message to the UE 10 in response to the received tracking area update request. Note that the MME-A 90 may notify that the tracking area update has failed due to the transmission of the response message or that the use of GRIP is not permitted. Here, the MME-A 90 may transmit a tracking area update accept message as a response message, and may include information indicating these pieces of notification information in the message.
 さらに、応答メッセージには、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を実行するPDNコネクションや、GRIPアドレスを取得した際に確立したPDNコネクションなど、GRIPアドレスを利用して実行するアプリケーションに対応づけたPDNコネクションを削除することを要求する情報を含めて送信してもよい。 Furthermore, the PDN connection associated with the application executed using the GRIP address, such as the PDN connection that executes communication using the GRIP address or the PDN connection established when the GRIP address is acquired, is deleted from the response message. You may transmit including the information which requests to do.
 なお、この際、MME-A90は、SGW35にベアラ更新要求メッセージを送信はしなくてもよい。 At this time, the MME-A 90 does not need to transmit a bearer update request message to the SGW 35.
 さらに、UE10は応答メッセージを受信し、応答メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいて、PDNコネクションを削除してもよい。UE10は、PDNコネクションの削除を実行する際、応答メッセージに基づいて、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を実行するPDNコネクションや、GRIPアドレスを取得した際に確立したPDNコネクションなど、GRIPアドレスを利用して実行するアプリケーションに対応づけたPDNコネクションを選択して削除を実行してもよい。なお、具体的には、UE10はPDN削除要求メッセージをMME-A90に送信して開始するPDN削除手続きを実行することによい、PDNコネクションを削除してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may receive the response message and delete the PDN connection based on the information included in the response message. When deleting the PDN connection, the UE 10 uses a GRIP address such as a PDN connection that executes communication using the GRIP address or a PDN connection that is established when the GRIP address is acquired based on the response message. The deletion may be executed by selecting the PDN connection associated with the application to be executed. Specifically, the UE 10 may delete a PDN connection, which may be performed by executing a PDN deletion procedure started by transmitting a PDN deletion request message to the MME-A 90.
 PDNコネクションの削除の方法は、これに限らず、他の方法であってもよい。例えば、MME-A90は、トラッキングエリア更新手続きに伴い、MMEが接続する基地局に接続する端末装置に対してGRIPの利用を許さない場合、MME-A90が主導してこうしたPDNコネクションを削除してもよい。なお、具体的には、MME-A90はセッション削除要求メッセージをSGW35に送信して開始するPDN削除手続きを実行することによい、PDNコネクションを削除してもよい。 The method of deleting the PDN connection is not limited to this, and other methods may be used. For example, when the MME-A 90 does not allow the use of GRIP to the terminal device connected to the base station to which the MME is connected in accordance with the tracking area update procedure, the MME-A 90 takes the initiative to delete such a PDN connection. Also good. Specifically, the MME-A 90 may delete the PDN connection, which may be performed by executing a PDN deletion procedure that starts by transmitting a session deletion request message to the SGW 35.
 以上のように、MME-A90はGRIPアドレスの利用可否の判定処理を実行してもよい。このように、MME-A90は、判定処理に基づいてMME-A90が接続する基地局に接続するUEのGRIPアドレスの利用を制限することができる。そのため、MEM-A90に接続する複数の基地局で構成されるエリアなど、エリア単位でGRIPアドレスの利用の可否を制御することができる。 As described above, the MME-A 90 may execute a process for determining whether or not the GRIP address can be used. As described above, the MME-A 90 can restrict the use of the GRIP address of the UE connected to the base station to which the MME-A 90 is connected based on the determination process. Therefore, it is possible to control whether or not the GRIP address can be used on an area basis, such as an area composed of a plurality of base stations connected to the MEM-A 90.
 次に、判定処理に基づいてME-A90は、トラッキングエリア更新手続きに伴い、MMEが接続する基地局に接続する端末装置に対して、GRIPの利用を許可した場合や、判定処理自体を実行しないなどの場合の手続きを、図10を基に引き続き説明する。 Next, based on the determination process, the ME-A 90 does not execute the determination process itself when the use of GRIP is permitted for the terminal device connected to the base station to which the MME is connected in accordance with the tracking area update procedure. The procedure in such a case will be described with reference to FIG.
 MME-A90は、コンテキストACKをMME40に送信し、位置管理装置の再配置(MME-Relocation)を完了する(S1010)。 The MME-A 90 transmits a context ACK to the MME 40, and completes the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device (S1010).
 さらに、MME-A90は、ベアラ更新要求メッセージをSGW35に送信してもよい(S1012)。これにより、MME-A90、UE10がPGW30との間に確立するPDNコネクションのQoS情報を更新することを要求してもよい。また、PDNコネクションに対応付けられるベアラのQoS情報の更新を要求してもよい。または、UE10が確立している他のUEとの間のIP接続のQoS情報の更新を要求してもよい。 Further, the MME-A 90 may transmit a bearer update request message to the SGW 35 (S1012). Accordingly, the MME-A 90 and the UE 10 may request to update the QoS information of the PDN connection established with the PGW 30. Moreover, you may request | require the update of the QoS information of the bearer matched with a PDN connection. Or you may request | require update of the QoS information of IP connection between other UEs which UE10 has established.
 メッセージには、PDNコネクションの識別情報、または他のUEとの間に確立しているIP接続などの通信路の識別情報を含んで送信してもよい。さらには、通信路に対応するQoS情報を含んで送信してもよい。 The message may include PDN connection identification information or communication path identification information such as an IP connection established with another UE. Furthermore, you may transmit including the QoS information corresponding to a communication channel.
 SGW35は、ベアラ要求メッセージを受信し、ベアラ要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、SGW35とPGW30はベアラ更新手続きを実行する(S1014)。ベアラ更新手続きでは、UE10がPGW30との間に確立するPDNコネクションのQoS情報を更新してもよい。また、PDNコネクションに対応付けられるベアラのQoS情報の更新を要求してもよい。または、UE10が確立している他のUEとの間のIP接続の通信路のQoS情報を更新してもよい。 The SGW 35 receives the bearer request message, and the SGW 35 and the PGW 30 execute a bearer update procedure based on the reception of the bearer request message (S1014). In the bearer update procedure, the QoS information of the PDN connection established by the UE 10 with the PGW 30 may be updated. Moreover, you may request | require the update of the QoS information of the bearer matched with a PDN connection. Or you may update the QoS information of the communication path of IP connection between other UEs which UE10 has established.
 SGW35とPGW30のベアラ更新手続きの完了後、SGW35はベアラ更新応答メッセージをMME-A90に送信する(S1016)。 After completing the bearer update procedure of the SGW 35 and PGW 30, the SGW 35 transmits a bearer update response message to the MME-A 90 (S1016).
 MME-A90は、ベアラ更新応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、トラッキングエリア更新アクセプトメッセージをUE10に送信する(S1018)。MME-A90はトラッキングエリア更新アクセプトメッセージを送信することにより、UE10が要求するトラッキングエリアの更新の要求に対してトラッキングエリアを更新したことを通知してもよい。 The MME-A 90 transmits a tracking area update accept message to the UE 10 based on the reception of the bearer update response message (S1018). The MME-A 90 may notify that the tracking area has been updated in response to the tracking area update request requested by the UE 10 by transmitting a tracking area update accept message.
 メッセージには、UE10とPGW30との間で確立しているPDNコネクションの更新されたQoS情報を含んで送信してもよい。さらに、MME-A90は、メッセージに、TFTやAPNなどアプリケーションを識別することができる情報を含めて送信してもよい。また、MME-A90は、メッセージにこれら両方の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。 The message may include the updated QoS information of the PDN connection established between the UE 10 and the PGW 30. Further, the MME-A 90 may transmit the message including information that can identify the application such as TFT and APN. Further, the MME-A 90 may transmit the message including both pieces of identification information.
 さらに、UE10と他のUEとの間で確立しているIP接続の通信路の更新されたQoS情報を含んで送信してもよい。 Furthermore, the updated QoS information of the communication path of the IP connection established between the UE 10 and another UE may be included and transmitted.
 さらに、これらの通信路の無線ベアラに関する情報を含めてもよい。例えば、周波数や、送信タイミングなど時間情報など、通信路の無線リソースに関する情報を含めて送信してもよい。無線リソースに関する情報は、MME-A90が改めて割り当てを行い、メッセージに含めて通知してもよいし、SGW35からベアラ更新応答メッセージに含まれる情報から取得し、UE10に通知してもよい。 Furthermore, information regarding the radio bearers of these communication paths may be included. For example, you may transmit including the information regarding the radio | wireless resource of a communication path, such as time information, such as a frequency and a transmission timing. The information regarding the radio resource may be allocated again by the MME-A 90 and notified in the message, or may be acquired from the information included in the bearer update response message from the SGW 35 and notified to the UE 10.
 さらに、トラッキングエリア更新アクセプトメッセージにはMME-A90の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。このように、MME-A90は、MME-A90の識別情報を含めてメッセージをUE10に送信することにより、位置管理装置が再配置(MME-Relocation)されたことを通知してもよい。 Furthermore, the tracking area update accept message may include the MME-A90 identification information. Thus, the MME-A 90 may notify that the location management device has been relocated (MME-Relocation) by transmitting a message including the identification information of the MME-A 90 to the UE 10.
 UE10は、MME-A90からトラッキングエリア更新アクセプトを受信し、受信に基づいてトラッキングエリア更新完了メッセージをMME-A90に送信してもよい。これにとものない、UE10は位置管理装置の再配置(MME-Relocation)を伴うトラッキングエリアの更新手続きを完了する。 The UE 10 may receive the tracking area update accept from the MME-A 90 and transmit a tracking area update completion message to the MME-A 90 based on the reception. Along with this, the UE 10 completes the tracking area update procedure accompanied by the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device.
 さらに、UE10は、トラッキングエリア更新アクセプトに含まれる情報に基づいて、無線ベアラに関する情報を更新してもよい。例えば、周波数や、送信タイミングなど時間情報など、通信路の無線リソースに関する情報を更新してもよい。無線リソースに関する情報は、PGW30との間のPDNコネクションに関する情報を更新してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may update information on the radio bearer based on information included in the tracking area update accept. For example, information related to radio resources of the communication path such as frequency and time information such as transmission timing may be updated. The information regarding the radio resource may be updated with respect to the PDN connection with the PGW 30.
 以上の手続きにより、UE10はアイドルモードの状態において、位置管理装置の再配置(MME-Relocation)を伴うトラッキングエリアの更新を行うことができる。 Through the above procedure, the UE 10 can update the tracking area accompanied by the relocation (MME-Relocation) of the location management device in the idle mode.
 また、上述した手続きでは、こうしたUE10のアイドルモードにおける移動に伴い、位置管理装置が再配置されたとしても移動先の基地局を管理する位置管理装置であるMME-A90が、移動前のMME40が保持するアプリケーション情報を取得することができるため、アプリケーションサーバ20は変更されることがなく、UE10は他のUEなどとのGRIPアドレスを用いたデータの送受信は維持することができる。 Further, in the above-described procedure, the MME-A 90 that is a location management device that manages the destination base station even if the location management device is rearranged due to the movement of the UE 10 in the idle mode, the MME 40 before the migration is Since the application information to be held can be acquired, the application server 20 is not changed, and the UE 10 can maintain transmission / reception of data using a GRIP address with another UE or the like.
 また、UE10は、トラッキングエリア更新要求には、MME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報を含めて送信してもよい。 Further, the UE 10 may transmit the tracking area update request including request information for requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20.
 この要求情報は、MME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得する必要があることを検出できればよく、アプリケーションサーバの識別情報を取得することを要求するフラグ等であってもよい。 This request information only needs to detect that the MME-A 90 needs to acquire the identification information of the application server 20, and may be a flag or the like requesting acquisition of the identification information of the application server.
 さらに、eNB-A95は、MME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報が含められたトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージを受信し、トラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージをMME-A90に送信してもよい。 Further, the eNB-A 95 receives the tracking area update request message including the request information for requesting the MME-A 90 to acquire the identification information of the application server 20, and transmits the tracking area update request message to the MME-A 90. May be.
 MME-A90へ送信するトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージには、UE10から受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージにアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報が含まれているか否かに基づいて、受信した要求情報を含めて送信してもよい。 Based on whether or not the tracking area update request message transmitted to the MME-A 90 includes request information requesting to acquire the identification information of the application server 20 in the tracking area update request message received from the UE 10. You may transmit including the received request information.
 また、MME-A90は、受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージにMME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報が含まれているか否かに基づいて、MME40に送信するコンテキスト要求メッセージにUE10にGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を許可するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグを含めてもよい。 Further, the MME-A 90 transmits a context to be transmitted to the MME 40 based on whether or not the received tracking area update request message includes request information for requesting the MME-A 90 to acquire the identification information of the application server 20. The request message may include a flag for requesting identification information of the application server 20 that permits the UE 10 to communicate using the GRIP address.
 例えば、MME-A90は、受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージにMME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報が含まれている場合いには、UE10にGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を許可するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグを含めてコンテキスト要求メッセージをMME40に送信する。 For example, the MME-A 90 uses the GRIP address for the UE 10 when the received tracking area update request message includes request information requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20. The context request message including the flag requesting the identification information of the application server 20 that permits the received communication is transmitted to the MME 40.
 また、受信したトラッキングエリア更新要求メッセージにMME-A90がアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を取得することを要求する要求情報が含まれていない場合には、UE10にGRIPアドレスを用いた通信を許可するアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を要求するフラグを含めずにコンテキスト要求メッセージをMME40に送信する。 In addition, when the received tracking area update request message does not include request information for requesting that the MME-A 90 obtain the identification information of the application server 20, the application that permits the UE 10 to communicate using the GRIP address. A context request message is transmitted to the MME 40 without including a flag for requesting identification information of the server 20.
 これにより、MME-A90は、MME40からアプリケーションサーバ20の識別情報を受信し、ProSeサーバに対してUE-R15の位置管理を行う位置管理装置が更新されたことを通知してもよい。 Thereby, the MME-A 90 may receive the identification information of the application server 20 from the MME 40 and notify the ProSe server that the location management device that manages the location of the UE-R 15 has been updated.
 [1.4.変形例]
 次に、変形例として、ProSe通信において、GRIPアドレスを利用する場合の、GRIPアドレスの取得方法について説明する。ただし本変形例では、UE10はProSeを利用できるUEであるとする。
[1.4. Modified example]
Next, as a modification, a method of acquiring a GRIP address when using a GRIP address in ProSe communication will be described. However, in this modification, it is assumed that the UE 10 is a UE that can use ProSe.
 [1.4.1.ProSeアプリケーションサーバへの登録手続き]
 UE10は、ProSeサービスとして提供される近隣端末検出(ProSe Direct Discovery)や直接通信路を用いた通信(ProSe Direct Communication)に対する認証手続きを実施する。認証手続きは、近隣端末検出と、直接通信路を用いた通信のそれぞれを異なる手続きで認証してもよいし、一つの認証手続きで認証してもよい。
[1.4.1. Registration procedure to ProSe application server]
The UE 10 performs an authentication procedure for proximity terminal detection (ProSe Direct Discovery) provided as a ProSe service and communication using a direct communication path (ProSe Direct Communication). The authentication procedure may authenticate each of the neighboring terminal detection and the communication using the direct communication path by different procedures, or may be authenticated by one authentication procedure.
 以下、図11を用いて本実施形態における認証手続きを説明する。 Hereinafter, the authentication procedure in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
 まず、UE10はアタッチ手続きを実行し、コアネットワークに接続する(S702)。結果、UE10はPGW30との間にPDNコネクションを確立する。PDNコネクションはPDN9との間でデータを送受信するための通信路である。アタッチ手続きはUE10の電源投入時など、初期手続きとして実行されて良い。 First, the UE 10 executes an attach procedure and connects to the core network (S702). As a result, the UE 10 establishes a PDN connection with the PGW 30. The PDN connection is a communication path for transmitting / receiving data to / from the PDN 9. The attach procedure may be executed as an initial procedure such as when the UE 10 is powered on.
 より具体的にはアタッチ手続きは、UE10がMME40にアタッチ要求を送信して開始する。UE10は、アタッチ要求に、APNと、IMSIなどのUEの識別情報と、を含めて送信してもよい。APNはアタッチ要求メッセージに必ずしも含まれる必要はなく、アタッチ手続き内の制御メッセージによってUE10からMME40に通知されてもよい。 More specifically, the attach procedure starts when the UE 10 transmits an attach request to the MME 40. The UE 10 may transmit the attach request including the APN and UE identification information such as IMSI. The APN is not necessarily included in the attach request message, and may be notified from the UE 10 to the MME 40 by a control message in the attach procedure.
 MME40は、受信したAPNに基づいてPGW30を選択し、UE10に対するPDNコネクションの端点を決定する。さらに、PDNコネクションの確立や、コアネットワークへの接続を許可し、アタッチ要求メッセージに対する応答となるアタッチ許可メッセージをUE10に送信する。なお、アタッチ許可メッセージは、MME40から直接UE10に送信されてもよいし、LTE AN80に含まれるeNB45を介して送信されてもよい。 The MME 40 selects the PGW 30 based on the received APN, and determines the end point of the PDN connection for the UE 10. Furthermore, establishment of a PDN connection and connection to a core network are permitted, and an attach permission message serving as a response to the attach request message is transmitted to the UE 10. The attach permission message may be transmitted directly from the MME 40 to the UE 10 or may be transmitted via the eNB 45 included in the LTE AN 80.
 また、MME40は、アタッチ許可メッセージの送信により、UE10がコアネットワーク接続を許可されたこと通知してもよい。また、MME40は、アタッチ許可メッセージの送信により、PDNコネクションを確立したことを通知してもよい。さらに、アタッチ許可メッセージには、PDNコネクションに対応づけられたIPアドレスや、APNを含めて送信してもよい。 Further, the MME 40 may notify that the UE 10 is permitted to connect to the core network by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the MME 40 may notify that the PDN connection has been established by transmitting an attach permission message. Further, the attach permission message may be transmitted including the IP address associated with the PDN connection or the APN.
 また、MME40は、アタッチ許可メッセージにProSe UE IDを含めて送信してもよい。例えば、MME40は、UE10がアタッチ手続きにおいて送信するAPNが、ProSeサービスに関連付けられたAPNであることを識別したことを基に、アタッチ許可メッセージProSe UE IDを含めて送信してもよい。MME40は、この際、UE_A8に対してProSe UE ID割り当てを行っても良い。また、HSS50から取得しても良い。この場合には、HSS50などが加入者情報に予めProSe UE IDを記憶しておくなどしてよい。 Further, the MME 40 may transmit the attach permission message including the ProSe UE ID. For example, the MME 40 may transmit the message including the attach permission message ProSe UE ID based on the fact that the APN transmitted by the UE 10 in the attach procedure is the APN associated with the ProSe service. At this time, the MME 40 may assign ProSe UE ID to the UE_A8. Moreover, you may acquire from HSS50. In this case, the HSS 50 or the like may store the ProSe UE ID in the subscriber information in advance.
 次に、UE10はProSe登録要求メッセージをProSeサーバに送信する(S706)。このとき、ProSeサーバは、ProSe機能をもつUE間の通信を管理するサーバ装置であり、ProSeサービスなどの提供に際し認証を行う。なお、ProSeサーバは、PDN9に含まれて構成されてもよいし、PDN9と独立していても良い。 Next, the UE 10 transmits a ProSe registration request message to the ProSe server (S706). At this time, the ProSe server is a server device that manages communication between UEs having the ProSe function, and performs authentication when providing a ProSe service or the like. The ProSe server may be configured to be included in the PDN 9 or may be independent of the PDN 9.
 UE10は、ProSe登録要求メッセージを送信することにより、近隣端末検出と、直接通信路を用いた通信の許可を要求してもよい。また、近隣端末検出と、直接通信路を用いた通信の許可とをそれぞれ識別する情報を含めて送信し、これらを個別に許可を求めてもよい。 The UE 10 may request permission of communication using a neighboring terminal detection and a direct communication path by transmitting a ProSe registration request message. Further, it is possible to transmit information including information for identifying the neighboring terminal detection and the permission of communication using the direct communication path, and request permission for each of them.
 また、ProSe登録要求の送信には、アタッチ手続きで確立したPDNコネクションを用いて送信してもよい。さらに、アタッチ手続きで取得したIPアドレスを送信元アドレスとしてProSe登録要求メッセージを送信してもよい。 Also, the ProSe registration request may be transmitted using the PDN connection established by the attach procedure. Further, the ProSe registration request message may be transmitted using the IP address acquired in the attach procedure as the transmission source address.
 また、ProSe登録要求メッセージの送信先のProSeサーバは、契約する通信事業者であるHome PLMNに対応づけられたProSeサーバの情報を予め保持しておき、送信先として用いても良い。 In addition, the ProSe server that is the transmission destination of the ProSe registration request message may hold the information of the ProSe server associated with the home PLMN that is the contracted communication carrier in advance and use it as the transmission destination.
 もしくは、ProSeサービスを提供可能な通信事業者のリストをローカルPLMNとして保持しておき、さらに、ローカルPLMNに対応づけられたProSeサーバを保持しておくことで、送信先として用いても良い。 Alternatively, a list of communication carriers that can provide the ProSe service is held as a local PLMN, and further, a ProSe server associated with the local PLMN may be held and used as a transmission destination.
 ローカルPLMNは、Home PLMNとの契約関係などで決定される任意の通信事業者でもよいし、Home PLMNと同一の国で運用する通信事業者であっても良い。 The local PLMN may be an arbitrary communication carrier determined based on a contract relationship with the Home PLMN, or may be a communication carrier operating in the same country as the Home PLMN.
 このように、UE10はPLMNを識別するPLMN IDとProSeサーバとを対応づけて保持しておき、送信先として用いて認証を要求しても良い。 As described above, the UE 10 may hold the PLMN ID for identifying the PLMN and the ProSe server in association with each other, and request authentication using the transmission destination.
 また、PLMN IDとProSeサーバの情報は、HomePLMNから取得しても良い。例えば、Home PLMNのProSeサーバに問い合わせを行い、問い合わせに対する応答により取得し、保持しても良い。 Also, the PLMN ID and ProSe server information may be obtained from the HomePLMN. For example, an inquiry may be made to the ProSe server of Home PLMN, and it may be acquired and retained by a response to the inquiry.
 ProSeサーバは、ProSe登録要求を受信し、近隣端末の検出および直接通信路を用いた通信の認証を実行し、ProSe登録応答を送信しても良い(S708)。 The ProSe server may receive the ProSe registration request, execute detection of neighboring terminals and authentication of communication using the direct communication path, and transmit a ProSe registration response (S708).
 ProSeサーバは、ProSe登録応答に、認証結果を含めて送信してもよい。さらに、ProSeサーバは、メッセージに、TFTやAPNなどアプリケーションを識別することができる識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。 The ProSe server may send the ProSe registration response including the authentication result. Further, the ProSe server may transmit the message including identification information such as TFT and APN that can identify the application.
 ProSeサーバはUE10に対応づけて認証するための情報を保持しておき、その情報に基づいて認証結果を可とするか不可とするか決定しても良い。 The ProSe server may store information for authentication in association with the UE 10, and may determine whether the authentication result is acceptable or not based on the information.
 また、ProSeサーバはProSe登録要求の受信に基づいてProSe UE IDの割り当てを実行しても良い(S707)。さらに、ProSe UE IDをProSe登録応答に含めてUE10へ送信してもよい。ProSe UE IDは、UE10に対応づけられたIDであってよく、UE10は、近隣端末の検出や、近隣端末へ自身を通知する場合に端末を識別する情報として用いても良い。より具体的には、UE10は、ProSe UE IDをアナウンス信号に含めて送信してもよい。 In addition, the ProSe server may execute allocation of the ProSe UE ID based on the reception of the ProSe registration request (S707). Further, the ProSe UE ID may be included in the ProSe registration response and transmitted to the UE 10. The ProSe UE ID may be an ID associated with the UE 10, and the UE 10 may be used as information for identifying a terminal when detecting a neighboring terminal or notifying the neighboring terminal of itself. More specifically, the UE 10 may transmit the ProSe UE ID included in the announcement signal.
 UE10は、ProSe登録応答を受信し、認証結果を取得する。また、ProSe登録応答に含まれるProSe UE IDを取得し、保持しても良い。以上により、UE10はProSeサーバに認証されてもよい。 UE10 receives the ProSe registration response and acquires the authentication result. Further, the ProSe UE ID included in the ProSe registration response may be acquired and held. As described above, the UE 10 may be authenticated by the ProSe server.
 これにより、UE10はPDNコネクティビティ手続き(S710)を開始する。 Thereby, the UE 10 starts the PDN connectivity procedure (S710).
 [1.4.2.PDNコネクティビティ手続き]
 PDNコネクティビティ手続きによるGRIPアドレスの取得手続きは、図8のPDNコネクティビティ手続きと等しくてもよい。ここでは、詳細な説明は省略する。PDNコネクティビティ手続きにより、UE10はGRIPアドレスを取得し、GRIPアドレスと、アプリケーションIDと関連付けて記憶することができる。
[1.4.2. PDN connectivity procedure]
The procedure for obtaining the GRIP address by the PDN connectivity procedure may be equal to the PDN connectivity procedure of FIG. Detailed description is omitted here. Through the PDN connectivity procedure, the UE 10 can acquire the GRIP address and store it in association with the GRIP address and the application ID.
 [1.4.3.ProSeアナウンス手続き]
 図12を用いて、GRIPアドレスを用いたProSeのアナウンス手続きについて説明する。GRIPアドレスを取得し、アプリケーションIDとGRIPアドレスを対応づけたUE10は、ProSeサーバとセキュアな接続を確立し、ディスカバリー要求をProSeサーバに送信する(S804)。
[1.4.3. ProSe Announcement Procedure]
A ProSe announcement procedure using a GRIP address will be described with reference to FIG. The UE 10 that has acquired the GRIP address and associates the application ID with the GRIP address establishes a secure connection with the ProSe server, and transmits a discovery request to the ProSe server (S804).
 ディスカバリー要求には、ProSeアプリケーションIDと、IMSIやMSISDNなどのUEの識別子と、アナウンスをすることの要求を示すコマンドと、アプリケーションIDとを含めてもよい。 The discovery request may include a ProSe application ID, a UE identifier such as IMSI or MSISDN, a command indicating a request for announcement, and an application ID.
 ProSeアプリケーションIDとは、ProSeを使用することができる端末を識別するための識別子である。 The ProSe application ID is an identifier for identifying a terminal that can use ProSe.
 ProSeサーバはUE10からディスカバリー要求を受信する。ProSeサーバは、ディスカバリー要求に含まれる、ProSeアプリケーションIDとUEの識別子と、アナウンスをすることの要求を示すコマンドと、アプリケーションIDとGRIPアドレスを取得する。 The ProSe server receives a discovery request from the UE 10. The ProSe server acquires the ProSe application ID and the UE identifier, the command indicating the request for announcement, the application ID, and the GRIP address included in the discovery request.
 ProSeサーバは、ProSeサーバの記憶部に、UE10の管理情報があるかを確認する。もし、ProSeサーバの記憶部にUE10の管理情報がない場合は、ProSeサーバは、HSS50にUE10の認証情報を確認し、新しいUE10の管理情報を作成する(S806)。これにより、UE10はProSeサーバにディスカバリー認証されていることとなる。 The ProSe server checks whether the management information of the UE 10 exists in the storage unit of the ProSe server. If there is no management information of the UE 10 in the storage unit of the ProSe server, the ProSe server confirms the authentication information of the UE 10 with the HSS 50 and creates new management information of the UE 10 (S806). As a result, the UE 10 has been authenticated for discovery by the ProSe server.
 ProSeサーバはUE10を認証したら、UE10にディスカバリー応答を送信する。ProSeサーバは、ディスカバリー応答に、ProSeアプリケーションコードと、タイマーとを含めてもよい。これにより、ProSeサーバは、タイマーのカウントが終了するまで、ProSeアプリケーションコードで識別されるアプリケーションの有効状態を維持することをUE10に指示することができる。 When the ProSe server authenticates the UE 10, it sends a discovery response to the UE 10. The ProSe server may include a ProSe application code and a timer in the discovery response. Thereby, the ProSe server can instruct the UE 10 to maintain the valid state of the application identified by the ProSe application code until the timer count ends.
 UE10は、ProSeサーバからディスカバリー応答を受信する。UE10は、メッセージに含まれるProSeのアプリケーションコードとタイマーを取得し、ProSeアプリケーションコードが識別するアナウンスを、タイマーで管理される時間、有効としてもよい。 UE 10 receives the discovery response from the ProSe server. The UE 10 may acquire the ProSe application code and timer included in the message, and may make the announcement identified by the ProSe application code valid for the time managed by the timer.
 UE10はProSeサーバからディスカバリー応答を受信する。UE10は、ディスカバリー応答に含まれる、ProSeアプリケーションコードと、タイマーを取得する。 UE10 receives the discovery response from the ProSe server. The UE 10 acquires a ProSe application code and a timer included in the discovery response.
 UE10は、ディスカバリー応答の受信に基づき、アナウンスを開始する(S810)。なお、UE10は、PDNコネクティビティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づき、ディスカバリーのアナウンスを開始してもよい。UE10が送信するアナウンス信号には、少なくともGRIPアドレスを取得したことを示す識別情報と、アプリケーションIDなどのアプリケーションの識別情報を含める。 UE10 starts the announcement based on the reception of the discovery response (S810). Note that the UE 10 may start an announcement of discovery based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message. The announcement signal transmitted by the UE 10 includes at least identification information indicating that the GRIP address has been acquired and application identification information such as an application ID.
 これにより、UE10と、UE10がアプリケーションIDで識別されたアプリケーションの通信にGRIPアドレスを用いて行うことができることを、アナウンス信号を受信した、UE10とは異なる近隣のUEに検出させる。 Thus, the UE 10 and the neighboring UE different from the UE 10 that has received the announcement signal are detected that the UE 10 and the UE 10 can perform communication of the application identified by the application ID using the GRIP address.
 なお、GRIPアドレスを取得したことを示す識別情報として、UE10が取得したGRIPアドレスを用いてもよい。 Note that the GRIP address acquired by the UE 10 may be used as identification information indicating that the GRIP address has been acquired.
 以上により、ProSeのアナウンス機能において、GRIPアドレスを用いることができる。 From the above, the GRIP address can be used in the announcement function of ProSe.
 [1.5.IPアドレス変更手続き]
 次に、UE10から開始する、UE10のGRIPアドレスの変更手続きについて説明する。
[1.5. IP address change procedure]
Next, a procedure for changing the GRIP address of the UE 10 starting from the UE 10 will be described.
 UE10は初期状態を以下に説明する。UE10は、アプリケーションサーバ20への認証手続きにより、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を提供するアプリケーションサーバ20にアプリケーションの利用と、GRIPアドレスの取得の認証を得ている。 The UE 10 will explain the initial state below. The UE 10 obtains the authentication of the use of the application and the acquisition of the GRIP address from the application server 20 that provides the communication using the GRIP address by the authentication procedure to the application server 20.
 さらに、UE10は、PDNコネクティビティ手続きにおいて、従来のIPアドレスの取得を要求し、従来のローカルIPアドレスを取得して、PDN接続を確立させて、通信を実現している。このときに、UE10がGRIPアドレスを用いた通信に切り替えたい場合、すでに取得している従来のローカルIPアドレスを、GRIPアドレスとして利用するためのIPアドレス変更手続きについて説明する。 Furthermore, the UE 10 requests acquisition of a conventional IP address in the PDN connectivity procedure, acquires a conventional local IP address, establishes a PDN connection, and realizes communication. At this time, when the UE 10 wants to switch to communication using the GRIP address, an IP address changing procedure for using the already acquired local IP address as the GRIP address will be described.
 この時、UE10はいずれかの制御手続を用いて、MME40に、IPアドレスの変更を要求する制御メッセージを送信し、MME40は受信したメッセージに基づき、UE10のIPアドレス変更手続きを認証する。 At this time, the UE 10 transmits a control message requesting the change of the IP address to the MME 40 using any of the control procedures, and the MME 40 authenticates the IP address change procedure of the UE 10 based on the received message.
 さらに、MME40は、PGW30に、IPアドレス変更手続きに認証許可を要求し、IPアドレスの認証許可を受信したら、UE10にIPアドレス変更要求に対する応答メッセージを送信する。 Further, the MME 40 requests the PGW 30 for authentication permission in the IP address change procedure, and when receiving the IP address authentication permission, transmits a response message to the IP address change request to the UE 10.
 ここで、IPアドレスの変更を要求する制御手続きは特に限定しないが、以下では、UEが主導して開始するサービス要求手続きを拡張した方法と、UEが主導して要求するベアラ変更要求手続きを拡張した方法を説明する。 Here, the control procedure for requesting the change of the IP address is not particularly limited, but in the following, the method for extending the service request procedure initiated by the UE and the bearer change request procedure requested by the UE are expanded. Explain the method.
 [1.5.1.サービス要求を用いたIPアドレスの変更]
 まず、UE開始のサービス要求を用いたIPアドレスの変更手続きについて図13を用いて説明する。初期状態は、UE10aはアタッチ手続きを実行してIPアドレスを取得した状態であってよい。なお、具体的なアタッチ手続きはすでに説明した方法と同じであるため、詳細な説明は省略する。
 また、初期状態は、アタッチ手続きの実行後に限らず、UE10aはPDNコネクティビティ手続きを実行して従来IPアドレスを取得した状態であってもよい。より具体的には、UE10aはAPNと、PDNタイプと、を含めてコアネットワークにPDNコネクティビィティ要求を送信し、メッセージの応答として、APNと、PDNタイプと、従来IPアドレスとを含めたPDNコネクティビィティ要求に対する応答をeNB45から受信してもよい。
[1.5.1. Change of IP address using service request]
First, an IP address changing procedure using a UE-initiated service request will be described with reference to FIG. The initial state may be a state in which the UE 10a acquires an IP address by executing an attach procedure. Note that the specific attachment procedure is the same as the method already described, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.
In addition, the initial state is not limited to after the attach procedure is executed, and the UE 10a may execute the PDN connectivity procedure and obtain a conventional IP address. More specifically, the UE 10a transmits a PDN connectivity request to the core network including the APN and the PDN type, and a PDN including the APN, the PDN type, and the conventional IP address as a message response. A response to the connectivity request may be received from the eNB 45.
 UE10はeNB45にサービス要求メッセージを送信する(S902)。メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報を含めてもよい。このように、UE10aは、サービス要求メッセージを送信することにより、既に取得しているIPアドレスを、GRIPアドレスに変更する要求を実施しても良い。なお、アプリケーションサーバへの登録手続き等でアプリケーションサーバ20に認証されていることに基づいて、UE10aは、こうした要求を実施しても良い。さらに、UE10aは、要求メッセージに、認証されていることを識別する情報をさらに含めて送信してもよい。 UE 10 transmits a service request message to eNB 45 (S902). The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address. As described above, the UE 10a may implement a request to change the already acquired IP address to the GRIP address by transmitting the service request message. Note that the UE 10a may make such a request based on the fact that the application server 20 is authenticated by a registration procedure with the application server or the like. Further, the UE 10a may transmit the request message further including information identifying that it is authenticated.
 また、UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSI(SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity)など、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 Further, the UE identification information may be any information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Also, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity).
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報や、アプリケーションの許可情報などを用いてもよい。また、フラグなどでもよい。 Further, the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
 eNB45は、UE10からサービス要求メッセージを受信する。eNB45は、メッセージをMME40に転送する(S904)。 ENB 45 receives a service request message from UE 10. The eNB 45 transfers the message to the MME 40 (S904).
 MME40はサービス要求メッセージをeNB45から受信する。MME40はメッセージの受信に基づいて、認証処理を実行する。具体的な認証処理としては、HSS50とUE10の認証情報を確認する(S906)。この時、認証情報の確認には、MME40が受信したメッセージに含まれるUE10の識別情報を用いてもよい。また、MME40のみでUE10の認証情報を確認してもよい。 The MME 40 receives a service request message from the eNB 45. The MME 40 executes an authentication process based on the reception of the message. As specific authentication processing, the authentication information of the HSS 50 and the UE 10 is confirmed (S906). At this time, the identification information of the UE 10 included in the message received by the MME 40 may be used for confirmation of the authentication information. Moreover, you may confirm the authentication information of UE10 only by MME40.
 なお、認証情報は、ユーザ情報と、ユーザにGRIPアドレスの割り当てるかを示す許可情報を対応づけて管理する管理情報であってよい。 Note that the authentication information may be management information that manages user information in association with permission information indicating whether to assign a GRIP address to the user.
 このとき、UE10の認証情報が確認できない場合や、UE10にGRIPアドレスの割り当てが許可されていない場合には、処理を停止してもよい。または、MME40とeNB45を介して、UE10に認証情報が確認できないことを通知してもよい。もしくは、GRIPアドレスへの変更や割り当てを許可しないことを通知してもよい。 At this time, if the authentication information of the UE 10 cannot be confirmed or if the UE 10 is not permitted to assign a GRIP address, the process may be stopped. Or you may notify that authentication information cannot be confirmed to UE10 via MME40 and eNB45. Alternatively, it may be notified that the change or assignment to the GRIP address is not permitted.
 さらに、MME40は、メッセージに含まれるIPアドレスの変更要求を示す情報要素に基づいて、こうしたGRIPアドレスに変更することに対する認証処理を実行してもよい。 Furthermore, the MME 40 may execute an authentication process for changing to such a GRIP address based on an information element indicating an IP address change request included in the message.
 UE10の認証情報の確認が完了し、更にGRIPアドレスの変更を認証した場合、MME40は、eNB45に、初期コンテキストの設定要求メッセージを送信する(S908)。eNB45は、MME40から初期コンテキスト設定要求メッセージを受信する。eNB45は、メッセージの受信に基づき、UE10とeNB45間で無線ベアラの確立または変更手続きをする(S910)。 When the confirmation of the authentication information of the UE 10 is completed and the change of the GRIP address is further authenticated, the MME 40 transmits an initial context setting request message to the eNB 45 (S908). The eNB 45 receives the initial context setting request message from the MME 40. The eNB 45 performs a radio bearer establishment or change procedure between the UE 10 and the eNB 45 based on the reception of the message (S910).
 つぎに、eNB45はMME40に初期コンテキスト設定応答メッセージを送信する(S912)。 Next, the eNB 45 transmits an initial context setting response message to the MME 40 (S912).
 MME40は、eNB45から初期コンテキスト設定応答メッセージを受信する。MME40はメッセージの受信に基づき、PGWにベアラ変更要求メッセージを送信する(S914)。なお、MME40は、UE10がGRIPアドレスの利用ができることを確認するなどの上述した認証処理の結果に基づいて、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを示す識別情報を含めてベアラ変更要求メッセージを送信してもよい。 The MME 40 receives the initial context setting response message from the eNB 45. Based on the reception of the message, the MME 40 transmits a bearer change request message to the PGW (S914). The MME 40 transmits a bearer change request message including identification information indicating that the IP address is changed to the GRIP address based on the result of the above-described authentication process such as confirming that the UE 10 can use the GRIP address. May be.
 なお、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを示す識別情報は、アプリケーション識別情報や、UE10のIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスであってもよい。 Note that the identification information indicating that the IP address is changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the IP address of the UE 10 may be a GRIP address.
 PGW30はMME40から、ベアラ変更要求メッセージを受信する。メッセージには、UEの識別情報、アプリケーション識別情報や、UE10のIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスにしたことを示す識別情報を含めてもよい。PGW30は、メッセージに含まれる、UE10のIPアドレス変更の通知に基づき、PGW30にGRIPアドレス管理表442に、UE10のIPアドレスを記憶する。 The PGW 30 receives a bearer change request message from the MME 40. The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address of the UE 10 is a GRIP address. The PGW 30 stores the IP address of the UE 10 in the GRIP address management table 442 in the PGW 30 based on the notification of the IP address change of the UE 10 included in the message.
 PGW30はベアラ変更要求メッセージの受信に基づき、MME40にベアラ変更応答メッセージを送信する(S916)。メッセージには、GRIPアドレスへ変更することを示す識別情報を含めてもよい。 The PGW 30 transmits a bearer change response message to the MME 40 based on the reception of the bearer change request message (S916). The message may include identification information indicating the change to the GRIP address.
 なお、PGW30は、ベアラ変更要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、UE10aから受信した、変更後のIPアドレスを送信元アドレスとするパケットは、異なる移動通信事業者網間のPGWへ配送を行うことができるなどの経路設定を実行してもよい。 Note that the PGW 30 can deliver the packet received from the UE 10a with the changed IP address as the transmission source address to the PGW between different mobile communication network based on the reception of the bearer change request message. The route setting such as may be executed.
 MME40は、PGW30からベアラ変更応答メッセージを受信する。MME40は、メッセージの受信に基づき、UE10に、サービス要求メッセージに含まれた、IPアドレス変更要求の応答として、IPアドレス変更応答メッセージを送信する(S918)。 The MME 40 receives a bearer change response message from the PGW 30. Based on the reception of the message, the MME 40 transmits an IP address change response message to the UE 10 as a response to the IP address change request included in the service request message (S918).
 MME40は、メッセージに、TFTやAPNなど、アプリケーションを識別する識別情報を含めてもよい。また、両方の識別情報を対応付けて含めてもよい。 The MME 40 may include identification information for identifying the application, such as TFT or APN, in the message. Further, both pieces of identification information may be included in association with each other.
 さらに、IPアドレス変更応答メッセージには、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスへ変更したことを示す情報を含めてUE10aにアドレス属性の変更を完了したことを通知してもよい。 Furthermore, the IP address change response message may include information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, and notify the UE 10a that the address attribute change has been completed.
 UE10はMME40から、IPアドレス変更応答メッセージを受信することにより、IPアドレスの変更がMME40に認証され、PGW30の記憶部で記憶される管理表が変更されたことが通知され、UE10が保持するIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスとして用いることができるようになる。 By receiving an IP address change response message from the MME 40, the UE 10 is notified that the change of the IP address has been authenticated by the MME 40, the management table stored in the storage unit of the PGW 30 has been changed, and the IP held by the UE 10 The address can be used as a GRIP address.
 これにより、UE10は、アプリケーションの通信を実施する際、アプリケーション識別情報を基に対応するGRIPアドレスを選択し、選択したGRIPアドレスを用いてアプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションデータの送受信を行うことができる。 Thereby, when performing communication of an application, the UE 10 selects a corresponding GRIP address based on the application identification information, and transmits / receives application data identified by the application identification information using the selected GRIP address. it can.
 これにより、UE10が従来のIPアドレスを用いてPGW30に送信しても、PGW30はUE10のアドレスをGRIPアドレスとして扱うことができ、宛先に転送することができるようになる。 Thus, even if the UE 10 transmits to the PGW 30 using the conventional IP address, the PGW 30 can handle the address of the UE 10 as a GRIP address and can transfer it to the destination.
 [1.5.2.UEからのベアラ変更要求手続きを用いたIPアドレス変更手続き]
 さらに、IPアドレス変更手続きの具体例として、UEから開始されるベアラ変更手続きを用いる方法について説明する。初期状態は、UE10が、ネットワークへアタッチし、アプリケーションサーバ20に登録手続きが完了し、従来のIPアドレスを用いて通信を行っている状態であり、すでに説明した状態と同じであるため、詳細な説明は省略する。
[1.5.2. IP address change procedure using bearer change request procedure from UE]
Furthermore, as a specific example of the IP address change procedure, a method using a bearer change procedure started from the UE will be described. The initial state is a state in which the UE 10 is attached to the network, the registration procedure with the application server 20 is completed, and communication is performed using a conventional IP address. Description is omitted.
 本具体例では、UE10は拡張してベアラ変更手続きを実行することにより、従来IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスへ変更する。なお、UE10は、移動またはQoSの変更などをトリガーとしてベアラ変更要求手続きを利用したIPアドレスの変更手続きを開始してもよいし、GRIPアドレスを用いた通信を行うアプリケーションの起動等に連動して開始してもよい。または、従来のUEから開始するベアラの変更手続きを開始するためのトリガーを用いてもよい。 In this specific example, the UE 10 expands and executes the bearer change procedure, thereby changing the conventional IP address to the GRIP address. Note that the UE 10 may start an IP address change procedure using a bearer change request procedure triggered by movement or QoS change, or in conjunction with activation of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. You may start. Or you may use the trigger for starting the change procedure of the bearer started from the conventional UE.
 以下、図14を用いて、従来のUEから開始するベアラ変更手続きを利用したIPアドレス変更手続きを説明する。 Hereinafter, an IP address changing procedure using a bearer changing procedure started from a conventional UE will be described with reference to FIG.
 UE10は、前記したトリガーに基づき、MME40にベアラ変更要求メッセージを送信する(S1102)。メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報を含めてもよい。 UE10 transmits a bearer change request message to MME40 based on an above described trigger (S1102). The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
 UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSI(SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity)など、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 The UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Also, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI (SAE Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity).
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報や、アプリケーションの許可情報などを用いてもよい。また、フラグなどでもよい。 Further, the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
 または、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、通信フローを識別する識別情報であってよい。なお、通信フローを識別する識別情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションに対応づけられた識別情報であってよい。 Alternatively, the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow. The identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
 具体的な通信フローを識別する識別情報は、TFTであってもよい。UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよいし、UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを識別するTFT IDを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよい。 The identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT. The UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. A TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
 さらに、UE10は、TFTやTFT ID等のフロー識別情報と、GRIPアドレスを要求する識別情報の両方を用いて、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
 メッセージには、さらに、ベアラIDや、QoSなど、従来のベアラ更新要求メッセージに含まれる情報要素を含めてもよい。 The message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer update request message such as bearer ID and QoS.
 MME40は、UE10から、ベアラ変更要求メッセージを受信する。メッセージに含まれる、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報に基づき、SGW35にベアラリソース指示メッセージを送信する(S1104)。 The MME 40 receives a bearer change request message from the UE 10. A bearer resource instruction message is transmitted to the SGW 35 based on the identification information included in the message that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address (S1104).
 メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報を含めてもよい。 The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
 UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSIなど、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 The UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報や、アプリケーションの許可情報などを用いてもよい。また、フラグなどでもよい。 Further, the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
 または、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、通信フローを識別する識別情報であってよい。なお、通信フローを識別する識別情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションに対応づけられた識別情報であってよい。 Alternatively, the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow. The identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
 具体的な通信フローを識別する識別情報は、TFTであってもよい。UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよいし、UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを識別するTFT IDを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよい。 The identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT. The UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. A TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
 さらに、UE10は、TFTやTFT ID等のフロー識別情報と、GRIPアドレスを要求する識別情報の両方を用いて、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
 メッセージには、さらに、ベアラID、QoSなど、従来のベアラリソース指示メッセージに含まれる情報要素を含めてもよい。 The message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer resource instruction message such as bearer ID and QoS.
 SGW35は、MME40からベアラリソースメッセージを受信し、受信したベアラIDに基づき、PGW30を選択する。SGW35は選択したPGW30に、ベアラリソース指示メッセージを送信する(S1106)。 The SGW 35 receives the bearer resource message from the MME 40 and selects the PGW 30 based on the received bearer ID. The SGW 35 transmits a bearer resource instruction message to the selected PGW 30 (S1106).
 メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報を含めてもよい。 The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information requesting to change the IP address to a GRIP address.
 UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSIなど、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 The UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報や、アプリケーションの許可情報などを用いてもよい。また、フラグなどでもよい。 Further, the identification information for requesting to change the IP address to the GRIP address may be application identification information, application permission information, or the like. Moreover, a flag etc. may be sufficient.
 または、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求する識別情報は、通信フローを識別する識別情報であってよい。なお、通信フローを識別する識別情報は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションに対応づけられた識別情報であってよい。 Alternatively, the identification information that requests changing the IP address to the GRIP address may be identification information that identifies the communication flow. The identification information for identifying the communication flow may be identification information associated with an application that performs communication using the GRIP address.
 具体的な通信フローを識別する識別情報は、TFTであってもよい。UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよいし、UE10は、GRIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションのトラヒックを識別することができるTFTを識別するTFT IDを、通信フローを識別する識別情報として用いてもよい。 The identification information for identifying a specific communication flow may be a TFT. The UE 10 may use, as identification information for identifying a communication flow, a TFT that can identify traffic of an application that performs communication using the GRIP address, or the UE 10 may use an application that performs communication using the GRIP address. A TFT ID for identifying a TFT capable of identifying traffic may be used as identification information for identifying a communication flow.
 さらに、UE10は、TFTやTFT ID等のフロー識別情報と、GRIPアドレスを要求する識別情報の両方を用いて、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更することを要求してもよい。 Furthermore, the UE 10 may request to change the IP address to the GRIP address by using both the flow identification information such as TFT and TFT ID and the identification information for requesting the GRIP address.
 メッセージには、さらに、ベアラID、QoSなど、従来のベアラリソース指示メッセージに含まれる情報要素を含めてもよい。 The message may further include information elements included in the conventional bearer resource instruction message such as bearer ID and QoS.
 PGW30は、SGW35からベアラリソース指示メッセージを受信する。メッセージにIPアドレスを変更することを要求する識別情報が含まれている場合、PGW30は、記憶部440で記憶されるGRIPアドレス管理表442に、UE10が用いている従来のIPアドレスを記憶し、GRIPアドレスに変更する。 The PGW 30 receives the bearer resource instruction message from the SGW 35. When the identification information requesting to change the IP address is included in the message, the PGW 30 stores the conventional IP address used by the UE 10 in the GRIP address management table 442 stored in the storage unit 440. Change to a GRIP address.
 または、IPアドレスを変更することを要求する識別情報は含まれず、アプリケーションの識別情報が含まれることで、UE10のIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更してもよい。または、アプリケーションの許可情報が含まれていることで、UE10のIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更してもよい。 Alternatively, the IP address of the UE 10 may be changed to the GRIP address by including the identification information of the application without including the identification information requesting to change the IP address. Alternatively, the IP address of the UE 10 may be changed to a GRIP address by including application permission information.
 なお、具体的な変更処理では、PGW30は、変更後のIPアドレスを送信元アドレスとするパケットは、異なる移動通信事業者網間の配送を行うことができるなどの経路設定を実行してもよい。 In a specific change process, the PGW 30 may execute path setting such that a packet having the changed IP address as a transmission source address can be delivered between different mobile communication carrier networks. .
 PGW30で、IPアドレスの変更が完了したら、ベアラを有効にしたり、無効にしたり、ベアラを変更したり、などの処理を開始してもよい。 When the change of the IP address is completed in the PGW 30, processing such as enabling the bearer, disabling the bearer, or changing the bearer may be started.
 PGW30は、IPアドレスの変更をすると、SGW35にベアラ確立(更新)メッセージを送信する(S1108)。 When the IP address is changed, the PGW 30 transmits a bearer establishment (update) message to the SGW 35 (S1108).
 メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報を含めてもよい。 The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address.
 UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSIなど、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 The UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報やなどを用いてもよい。 Further, the identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the like.
 メッセージには、さらに、QoSなど、従来のベアラ確立(更新)メッセージに含まれる情報要素を含めてもよい。 The message may further include an information element included in a conventional bearer establishment (update) message such as QoS.
 SGW35は、PGW30から、ベアラ確立(更新)メッセージを受信する。SGW35はメッセージに、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報が含まれている場合、MME40にベアラ確立(更新)メッセージを送信する(S1110)。 The SGW 35 receives a bearer establishment (update) message from the PGW 30. If the message includes identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, the SGW 35 transmits a bearer establishment (update) message to the MME 40 (S1110).
 メッセージには、UEの識別情報と、アプリケーションの識別情報と、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報を含めてもよい。 The message may include UE identification information, application identification information, and identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address.
 UEの識別情報は、UE10を識別できる情報要素であればよく、例えばIMSIなどでもよい。またS-TMSIなど、UEとMMEを識別できる情報要素であってもよい。 The UE identification information may be an information element that can identify the UE 10, and may be, for example, IMSI. Further, it may be an information element that can identify the UE and the MME, such as S-TMSI.
 また、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報は、アプリケーションの識別情報やなどを用いてもよい。 Further, the identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address may be application identification information or the like.
 メッセージには、さらに、QoSなど、従来のベアラ確立(更新)メッセージに含まれる情報要素を含めてもよい。 The message may further include an information element included in a conventional bearer establishment (update) message such as QoS.
 MME40は、SGW35から、ベアラ更新(確立)要求メッセージを受信する。受信メッセージに、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報が含まれている場合、MME40はUE10から受信したベアラ変更要求の応答として、UE10にIPアドレス変更通知を送信する(S1112)。 The MME 40 receives a bearer update (establishment) request message from the SGW 35. When the received message includes identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, the MME 40 transmits an IP address change notification to the UE 10 as a response to the bearer change request received from the UE 10 (S1112).
 MME40は、メッセージに、アプリケーションを識別するTFTまたはAPNを含めてもよい。また、その両方の識別情報を含めてもよい。 The MME 40 may include a TFT or APN identifying the application in the message. Further, both pieces of identification information may be included.
 さらに、MME40は、メッセージにIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したこと示す識別情報を含めてもよい。 Further, the MME 40 may include identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address in the message.
 UE10はMME40から、IPアドレス変更通知を受信する。受信メッセージに、IPアドレスをGRIPアドレスに変更したことを示す識別情報が含まれている場合、UE10は、保持するIPアドレスをGRIPアドレスとして利用することができる。 UE10 receives IP address change notification from MME40. When the received message includes identification information indicating that the IP address has been changed to the GRIP address, the UE 10 can use the held IP address as the GRIP address.
 これにより、UE10は、アプリケーションの通信を実施する際、アプリケーション識別情報を基に対応するGRIPアドレスを選択し、選択したGRIPアドレスを用いてアプリケーション識別情報で識別されるアプリケーションデータの送受信を行うことができる。 Thereby, when performing communication of an application, the UE 10 selects a corresponding GRIP address based on the application identification information, and transmits / receives application data identified by the application identification information using the selected GRIP address. it can.
 以上で、UE10が従来のIPアドレスを用いてPGW30にデータを送信しても、PGW30はUE10のアドレスをGRIPアドレスとして扱うことができ、宛先に転送することができるようになる。 As described above, even if the UE 10 transmits data to the PGW 30 using the conventional IP address, the PGW 30 can handle the address of the UE 10 as a GRIP address and can transfer it to the destination.
 以上、この発明の実施形態および変形例について図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計等も特許請求の範囲に含まれる。 As mentioned above, although embodiment and modification of this invention were explained in full detail with reference to drawings, the concrete structure is not restricted to this embodiment, and the design etc. of the range which does not deviate from the summary of this invention are patents. Included in the claims.
 また、各実施形態において各装置で動作するプログラムは、上述した実施形態の機能を実現するように、CPU等を制御するプログラム(コンピュータを機能させるプログラム)である。そして、これら装置で取り扱われる情報は、その処理時に一時的に一時記憶装置(例えば、RAM)に蓄積され、その後、各種ROMやHDDの記憶装置に格納され、必要に応じてCPUによって読み出し、修正・書き込みが行なわれる。 In each embodiment, a program that operates in each device is a program that controls a CPU or the like (a program that causes a computer to function) so as to realize the functions of the above-described embodiments. Information handled by these devices is temporarily stored in a temporary storage device (for example, RAM) at the time of processing, then stored in various ROM or HDD storage devices, and read and corrected by the CPU as necessary. • Writing is performed.
 ここで、プログラムを格納する記録媒体としては、半導体媒体(例えば、ROMや、不揮発性のメモリカード等)、光記録媒体・光磁気記録媒体(例えば、DVD(Digital Versatile Disc)、MO(Magneto Optical Disc)、MD(Mini Disc)、CD(Compact Disc)、BD等)、磁気記録媒体(例えば、磁気テープ、フレキシブルディスク等)等のいずれであってもよい。また、ロードしたプログラムを実行することにより、上述した実施形態の機能が実現されるだけでなく、そのプログラムの指示に基づき、オペレーティングシステムあるいは他のアプリケーションプログラム等と共同して処理することにより、本発明の機能が実現される場合もある。 Here, as a recording medium for storing the program, a semiconductor medium (for example, ROM, a non-volatile memory card, etc.), an optical recording medium / a magneto-optical recording medium (for example, DVD (Digital Versatile Disc), MO (Magneto Optical) Disc), MD (Mini Disc), CD (Compact Disc), BD, etc.), magnetic recording medium (eg, magnetic tape, flexible disk, etc.), etc. In addition, by executing the loaded program, not only the functions of the above-described embodiment are realized, but also based on the instructions of the program, the processing is performed in cooperation with the operating system or other application programs. The functions of the invention may be realized.
 また、市場に流通させる場合には、可搬型の記録媒体にプログラムを格納して流通させたり、インターネット等のネットワークを介して接続されたサーバコンピュータに転送したりすることができる。この場合、サーバコンピュータの記憶装置も本発明に含まれるのは勿論である。 In addition, when distributing to the market, the program can be stored in a portable recording medium for distribution, or transferred to a server computer connected via a network such as the Internet. In this case, of course, the storage device of the server computer is also included in the present invention.
 また、上述した実施形態における各装置の一部又は全部を典型的には集積回路であるLSI(Large Scale Integration)として実現してもよい。各装置の各機能ブロックは個別にチップ化してもよいし、一部、または全部を集積してチップ化してもよい。また、集積回路化の手法はLSIに限らず専用回路、または汎用プロセッサで実現しても良い。また、半導体技術の進歩によりLSIに代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、当該技術による集積回路を用いることも可能であることは勿論である。 Further, a part or all of each device in the above-described embodiment may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration) which is typically an integrated circuit. Each functional block of each device may be individually formed as a chip, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a chip. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. In addition, when integrated circuit technology that replaces LSI appears due to progress in semiconductor technology, it is of course possible to use an integrated circuit based on this technology.
 また、上述した実施形態においては、無線アクセスネットワークの例としてLTEと、WLAN(例えば、IEEE802.11a/b/n等)とについて説明したが、WLANの代わりにWiMAXによって接続されても良い。 In the above-described embodiment, LTE and WLAN (for example, IEEE802.11a / b / n) are described as examples of the radio access network, but they may be connected by WiMAX instead of WLAN.
1 通信システム
5 IP移動通信ネットワーク
7 コアネットワーク
9 PDN
10 UE
20 アプリケーションサーバ
30 PGW
35 SGW
40 MME
45 eNB
50 HSS
55 AAA
60 PCRF
65 ePDG
70 WLAN_ANa
72 WLAN APa
74 GW
75 WLAN_ANb
76 WLAN_APb
80 LTE_AN
 
 
1 Communication System 5 IP Mobile Communication Network 7 Core Network 9 PDN
10 UE
20 Application server 30 PGW
35 SGW
40 MME
45 eNB
50 HSS
55 AAA
60 PCRF
65 ePDG
70 WLAN_ANA
72 WLAN APa
74 GW
75 WLAN_ANb
76 WLAN_APb
80 LTE_AN

Claims (21)

  1.  端末装置であって、
     MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信する送信部と、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信する受信部と、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、
     前記第1の識別情報の送信に基づいて、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得する記憶部と、
     を有する端末装置。
    A terminal device,
    A transmission unit that transmits a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message to an MME (Mobility Management Entity);
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating requesting assignment of a globally routable IP address;
    As a response to the PDN connectivity request message, a receiving unit that receives a PDN connectivity accept message from the base station device;
    The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    A storage unit for acquiring the globally routable IP address based on the transmission of the first identification information;
    A terminal device.
  2.  前記送信部は、
     アプリケーションサーバに認証要求メッセージを送信することにより、
     前記アプリケーションサーバに前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションの利用に対する認証を要求し、
     制御メッセージの受信に基づいて前記MMEに前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信し、
     前記受信部は、
     前記認証要求メッセージに対する応答であり、前記アプリケーションサーバが送信する認証を完了したことを示す前記制御メッセージを受信する、
     請求項1に記載の端末装置。
    The transmitter is
    By sending an authentication request message to the application server,
    Requesting the application server to authenticate the use of an application that communicates using the globally routable IP address;
    Sending the PDN connectivity request message to the MME based on receipt of a control message;
    The receiver is
    Receiving the control message, which is a response to the authentication request message and indicates that the authentication transmitted by the application server has been completed.
    The terminal device according to claim 1.
  3.  前記記憶部は、
     前記制御メッセージに含まれる認証情報を取得し、
     前記送信部は、
     少なくとも前記認証情報を含めて前記MMEに前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信する、
     請求項2に記載の端末装置。
    The storage unit
    Obtaining authentication information contained in the control message;
    The transmitter is
    Sending the PDN connectivity request message to the MME including at least the authentication information;
    The terminal device according to claim 2.
  4.  前記記憶部は、
     グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションを識別する第2の識別情報を記憶し、
     前記アプリケーションと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを対応づけて記憶し、
     前記送信部及び前記受信部は、
     前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて前記アプリケーションの通信を行う、
     請求項1に記載の端末装置。
    The storage unit
    Storing second identification information for identifying an application that performs communication using a globally routable IP address;
    Storing the application and the globally routable IP address in association with each other;
    The transmitter and the receiver are
    Communication of the application is performed using the globally routable IP address.
    The terminal device according to claim 1.
  5.  前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づいて、PGW(PDN Gateway)との間にPDNコネクションを確立する制御部を更に有し、
     前記送信部及び前記受信部は、
     前記アプリケーションの通信を、前記PDNコネクションを用いて行う、
     請求項4に記載の端末装置。
    A control unit for establishing a PDN connection with a PGW (PDN Gateway) based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message;
    The transmitter and the receiver are
    Communication of the application is performed using the PDN connection.
    The terminal device according to claim 4.
  6.  前記送信部は、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づいて、少なくとも、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得したことを示す第3の識別情報と、前記第2の情報を含んだアナウンス信号を近隣に報知することで、
     前記端末装置が前記アプリケーションの通信を前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて行うことができることを、近隣端末に検出させる、
     請求項4に記載の端末装置。
    The transmitter is
    Based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message, at least third identification information indicating that the globally routable IP address has been acquired and an announcement signal including the second information are broadcast to the neighborhood With that
    Allowing the terminal device to detect that the terminal device can perform communication of the application using the globally routable IP address;
    The terminal device according to claim 4.
  7.  前記第3の識別情報は、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスである、
     請求項6に記載の端末装置。
    The third identification information is the globally routable IP address.
    The terminal device according to claim 6.
  8.  MME(Mobility Management Entity)であって、
     端末装置からPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを受信する受信部と、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置へ送信し、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージに前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信する送信部と、
     を有するMME。
    MME (Mobility Management Entity),
    A receiving unit for receiving a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from the terminal device;
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating requesting assignment of a globally routable IP address;
    In response to the PDN connectivity request message, a PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station apparatus,
    The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    A transmission unit configured to transmit the PDN connectivity accept message including the globally routable IP address based on the reception of the first identification information;
    MME with
  9.  PGW(PDN Gateway)であって、
     端末装置のPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージの送信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGW(Serving Gateway)から受信する受信部と、
     前記セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当てる制御部と、
     前記セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、セッション確立応答メッセージを前記SGWへ送信する送信部とを有し、
     前記セッション確立応答メッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含める、
     PGW。
    PGW (PDN Gateway),
    A receiving unit that receives a session establishment request message from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on transmission of a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message of the terminal device;
    The session establishment request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that an assignment of a globally routable IP address is requested,
    A control unit that assigns a globally routable IP address based on reception of the first identification information;
    A transmission unit that transmits a session establishment response message to the SGW as a response to the session establishment request message;
    The session establishment response message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address.
    PGW.
  10.  端末装置であって、
     MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信し、
     IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更することを要求する第1の要求メッセージを前記MMEまたは前記基地局装置に送信する送信部と、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、を含み、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを前記基地局装置から受信し、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、
     前記第1の要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージを受信する受信部と、
     前記応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、IPアドレスを前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更する記憶部と、
     を有する端末装置。
    A terminal device,
    Send a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message to MME (Mobility Management Entity),
    A transmission unit that transmits a first request message requesting to change an IP address to a globally routable IP address to the MME or the base station device;
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN and a PDN type,
    In response to the PDN connectivity request message, a PDN connectivity accept message is received from the base station device,
    The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    A receiving unit for receiving a response message to the first request message;
    A storage unit that changes an IP address to the globally routable IP address based on reception of the response message;
    A terminal device.
  11.  端末装置の通信制御方法であって、
     MME(Mobility Management Entity)にPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信するステップと、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信するステップと、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含み、
     前記第1の識別情報の送信に基づいて、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得するステップと、
     を含める端末装置の通信制御方法。
    A communication control method for a terminal device,
    Transmitting a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message to an MME (Mobility Management Entity);
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating requesting assignment of a globally routable IP address;
    Receiving a PDN connectivity accept message from the base station apparatus as a response to the PDN connectivity request message;
    The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    Obtaining the globally routable IP address based on the transmission of the first identification information;
    Control method for a terminal device including
  12.  前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションの利用に対する認証を要求するためにアプリケーションサーバに認証要求メッセージを送信するステップと、
     前記認証要求メッセージに対する応答であり、前記アプリケーションサーバが送信する認証を完了したことを示す制御メッセージを受信するステップを更に含み、
     前記制御メッセージの受信に基づいて前記MMEに前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信する、
     請求項11に記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    Sending an authentication request message to an application server to request authentication for use of an application that communicates using the globally routable IP address;
    Receiving a control message that is a response to the authentication request message and indicates that the authentication sent by the application server has been completed;
    Sending the PDN connectivity request message to the MME based on receipt of the control message;
    The communication control method of the terminal device according to claim 11.
  13.  前記制御メッセージに含まれる認証情報を取得するステップを更に含み、
     少なくとも前記認証情報を含めて前記MMEに前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信する、
     請求項12に記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    Further comprising obtaining authentication information included in the control message;
    Sending the PDN connectivity request message to the MME including at least the authentication information;
    The communication control method of the terminal device according to claim 12.
  14.  前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて通信を行うアプリケーションを識別する第2の識別情報を記憶するステップと、
     前記アプリケーションと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを対応づけて記憶するステップと、
     前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて前記アプリケーションの通信を行うステップと、
     を更に含める請求項11記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    Storing second identification information for identifying an application that performs communication using the globally routable IP address;
    Associating and storing the application and the globally routable IP address;
    Communicating the application using the globally routable IP address;
    The communication control method for a terminal device according to claim 11, further comprising:
  15.  前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づいて、PGW(PDN Gateway)との間にPDNコネクションを確立するステップを含み、
     前記アプリケーションの通信を、前記PDNコネクションを用いて行う、
     請求項14に記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    Establishing a PDN connection with a PGW (PDN Gateway) based on the reception of the PDN Connectivity Accept message,
    Communication of the application is performed using the PDN connection.
    The communication control method of the terminal device according to claim 14.
  16.  前記端末装置が前記アプリケーションの通信を前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを用いて行うことができることを、近隣端末に検出させるために、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づいて、少なくとも、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得したことを示す第3の識別情報と、前記第2の識別情報を含んだアナウンス信号を近隣に報知するステップを含める、
     請求項14に記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    In order for the terminal device to detect that the terminal device can perform communication of the application using the globally routable IP address,
    Based on the reception of the PDN connectivity accept message, at least third identification information indicating that the globally routable IP address has been acquired and an announcement signal including the second identification information are broadcast to the neighborhood Include steps to
    The communication control method of the terminal device according to claim 14.
  17.  前記第3の識別情報は、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスである、
     請求項16に記載の端末装置の通信制御方法。
    The third identification information is the globally routable IP address.
    The communication control method of the terminal device according to claim 16.
  18.  MME(Mobility Management Entity)の通信制御方法であって、
     端末装置からPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを受信するステップと、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置へ送信するステップと、
     前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記識別情報の受信に基づいて、前記PDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージに前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めて送信するステップと、
     を含めるMMEの通信制御方法。
    A communication control method of MME (Mobility Management Entity),
    Receiving a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message from the terminal device;
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating requesting assignment of a globally routable IP address;
    As a response to the PDN connectivity request message, transmitting a PDN connectivity accept message to the base station device;
    The PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and a globally routable IP address,
    Transmitting the PDN connectivity accept message including the globally routable IP address based on receiving the identification information;
    MME communication control method.
  19.  PGW(PDN Gateway)の通信制御方法であって、
     端末装置のPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージの送信に基づいて、セッション確立要求メッセージをSGW(Serving Gateway)から受信するステップと、
     前記セッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当てるステップと、
     前記セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めてセッション確立応答メッセージを前記SGWへ送信するステップと、
     を含めるPGWの通信制御方法。
    A communication control method of PGW (PDN Gateway),
    Receiving a session establishment request message from an SGW (Serving Gateway) based on the transmission of a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message of the terminal device;
    The session establishment request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating that an assignment of a globally routable IP address is requested,
    Assigning a globally routable IP address based on receiving the first identification information;
    Sending a session establishment response message to the SGW including at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address as a response to the session establishment request message;
    PGW communication control method including
  20.  端末装置の通信制御方法であって、
     MME(Mobility Management Entity)に少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプを含めてPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信するステップと、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを含めたPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを基地局装置から受信するステップと、
     IPアドレスをグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更することを要求する第1の要求メッセージを前記MMEまたは前記基地局装置に送信するステップと、
     前記第1の要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージを受信するステップと、
     前記応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、IPアドレスを前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスに変更するステップと、
     を含める端末装置の通信制御方法。
    A communication control method for a terminal device,
    Transmitting a PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message including at least an APN and a PDN type to MME (Mobility Management Entity);
    Receiving a PDN connectivity accept message including at least an APN, a PDN type, and a globally routable IP address as a response to the PDN connectivity request message;
    Transmitting a first request message requesting to change an IP address to a globally routable IP address to the MME or the base station device;
    Receiving a response message to the first request message;
    Changing an IP address to the globally routable IP address based on receiving the response message;
    Control method for a terminal device including
  21.  少なくとも端末装置と基地局装置とMME(Mobility Management Entity)とSGW(Serving Gateway)とPGW (PDN Gateway)を含んで構成する通信システムであって、
     前記端末装置は、
     前記MMEにPDN(Packet Data Network)コネクティビティ要求メッセージを送信し、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスの割り当てを要求することを示す第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記MMEは、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージを前記端末装置から受信し、
     前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、第1のセッション確立要求メッセージを前記SGWへ送信し、
     前記第1のセッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記SGWは、
     前記第1のセッション確立要求メッセージを前記MMEから受信し、
     前記第1のセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のセッション確立要求メッセージを前記PGWへ送信し、
     前記第2のセッション確立要求メッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記第1の識別情報とを含み、
     前記PGWは、
     前記第2のセッション確立要求メッセージを前記SGWから受信し、
     前記第1の識別情報の受信に基づいて、前記端末装置にグローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを割り当て、
     前記第2のセッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、第1のセッション確立応答メッセージを前記SGWへ送信し、
     前記第1のセッション確立応答メッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記SGWは、
     前記第1のセッション確立応答メッセージを前記PGWから受信し、
     前記第1のセッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、前記MMEが送信する前記第1のセッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答として、第2のセッション確立応答メッセージを前記MMEに送信し、
     前記第2のセッション確立応答メッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記MMEは、
     前記第2のセッション確立応答メッセージを前記SGWから受信し、
     前記第2のセッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、前記MMEが送信する前記PDNコネクティビティ要求メッセージに対する応答として、第1のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを前記基地局に送信し、
     前記第1のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくとも前記APNと、前記PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記基地局装置は、
     前記第1のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを前記MMEから受信し、
     前記第1のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを前記端末装置に送信し、
     前記第2のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージには、少なくともAPNと、PDNタイプと、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスとを含み、
     前記端末装置は、
     前記第2のPDNコネクティビィティアクセプトメッセージを前記基地局装置から受信し、
     前記識別情報の送信に基づいて、前記グローバリールータブルなIPアドレスを取得する、
     通信システム。
    A communication system including at least a terminal device, a base station device, an MME (Mobility Management Entity), an SGW (Serving Gateway), and a PGW (PDN Gateway),
    The terminal device
    A PDN (Packet Data Network) connectivity request message is sent to the MME;
    The PDN connectivity request message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and first identification information indicating requesting assignment of a globally routable IP address;
    The MME is
    Receiving the PDN connectivity request message from the terminal device;
    Based on the reception of the PDN connectivity request message, a first session establishment request message is sent to the SGW;
    The first session establishment request message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the first identification information,
    The SGW is
    Receiving the first session establishment request message from the MME;
    Based on receiving the first session establishment request message, sending a second session establishment request message to the PGW;
    The second session establishment request message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the first identification information,
    The PGW is
    Receiving the second session establishment request message from the SGW;
    Based on the reception of the first identification information, a globally routable IP address is assigned to the terminal device,
    Sending a first session establishment response message to the SGW as a response to the second session establishment request message;
    The first session establishment response message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    The SGW is
    Receiving the first session establishment response message from the PGW;
    Based on the reception of the first session establishment response message, a second session establishment response message is transmitted to the MME as a response to the first session establishment request message transmitted by the MME;
    The second session establishment response message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address,
    The MME is
    Receiving the second session establishment response message from the SGW;
    Based on the reception of the second session establishment response message, a first PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the base station as a response to the PDN connectivity request message transmitted by the MME;
    The first PDN connectivity accept message includes at least the APN, the PDN type, and the globally routable IP address;
    The base station device
    Receiving the first PDN connectivity accept message from the MME;
    Based on the reception of the first PDN connectivity accept message, a second PDN connectivity accept message is transmitted to the terminal device;
    The second PDN connectivity accept message includes at least an APN, a PDN type, and the globally routable IP address;
    The terminal device
    Receiving the second PDN connectivity accept message from the base station device;
    Obtaining the globally routable IP address based on the transmission of the identification information;
    Communications system.
PCT/JP2015/069592 2014-07-09 2015-07-08 Terminal device, mme, pgw, communication system and communication control method WO2016006622A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014141233A JP2017152754A (en) 2014-07-09 2014-07-09 Terminal, mme, pgw, communication system, and communication control method
JP2014-141233 2014-07-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016006622A1 true WO2016006622A1 (en) 2016-01-14

Family

ID=55064251

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/069592 WO2016006622A1 (en) 2014-07-09 2015-07-08 Terminal device, mme, pgw, communication system and communication control method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP2017152754A (en)
WO (1) WO2016006622A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024009838A1 (en) * 2022-07-08 2024-01-11 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ Communication device and communication method

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010522483A (en) * 2007-03-23 2010-07-01 マーベル ワールド トレード リミテッド Selection of IP mobility mechanism for multi-mode terminal with direct IP connectivity
WO2010109902A1 (en) * 2009-03-27 2010-09-30 シャープ株式会社 Mobile communication system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010522483A (en) * 2007-03-23 2010-07-01 マーベル ワールド トレード リミテッド Selection of IP mobility mechanism for multi-mode terminal with direct IP connectivity
WO2010109902A1 (en) * 2009-03-27 2010-09-30 シャープ株式会社 Mobile communication system
JP2012182802A (en) * 2009-03-27 2012-09-20 Sharp Corp Mobile terminal device, external gateway device, and communication method

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024009838A1 (en) * 2022-07-08 2024-01-11 パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ Communication device and communication method

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2017152754A (en) 2017-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6483617B2 (en) Terminal device, relay terminal device, and communication control method
AU2018289655B2 (en) User equipment, communication control method of user equipment, core network device, communication control method of core network, SMF, and communication control method of SMF
US11696125B2 (en) Terminal device and communication method for terminal device
AU2018289916B2 (en) Terminal apparatus and core network device
WO2018207837A1 (en) User device
JP6698587B2 (en) UE and UE communication control method
CN107087443B (en) Terminal device, base station device, mobility management entity, and communication control method
WO2010150734A1 (en) Mobile communication system, subscriber information management apparatus, position management apparatus, home base station and mobile terminal
KR20120030552A (en) Mobile communication system, subscriber information management apparatus, position management apparatus and home base station
US10313867B2 (en) Terminal device, device provided with prose function, communication method for terminal device, and communication method for device provided with prose function
WO2015105183A1 (en) Communication control method, position management device, base station device, terminal device, and communication system
JP2019004409A (en) Terminal device, core network device, data network device and communication control method
KR102457062B1 (en) Terminal device, core network device, and communication control method
WO2020145305A1 (en) Ue and smf
JP2018093252A (en) Terminal device, MME, PGW, and communication control method
WO2016006622A1 (en) Terminal device, mme, pgw, communication system and communication control method
JP6728139B2 (en) UE, TWAG, UE communication control method and TWAG communication control method
WO2021029381A1 (en) Ue and communication control method
WO2016163411A1 (en) Terminal device, pgw, and twag
WO2020100637A1 (en) Ue and smf
KR101598598B1 (en) Integrated base station and method for providing intelligent service

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15818274

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15818274

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1